Download Manual - LPT Home Page - HP LaserJet and Lexmark Parts

hp LaserJet 3300mfp
series
service
hp LaserJet 3300mfp series
Service
Copyright Information
Trademark Credits
5
© 2002 Hewlett-Packard
Company
Microsoft, Windows, and MSDOS are U.S. registered
trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Unplug this product from
wall outlets before
cleaning.
6
TrueType is a U.S. trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc.
Do not install or use this
product near water or
when you are wet.
7
All other products mentioned
herein may be trademarks of
their respective companies.
Install the product securely
on a stable surface.
8
Install the product in a
protected location where
no one can step on or trip
over the power cord and
the power cord will not be
damaged.
9
If the product does not
operate normally, see the
online user guide.
10
Refer all servicing
questions to qualified
personnel.
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptations, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited except
as allowed under copyright
laws.
Part number C9124-90948
Second edition, February 2002
Warranty
The information contained in
this document is subject to
change without notice.
Safety Information
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with
respect to this information.
HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Always follow basic safety
precautions when using this
product to reduce risk of injury
from fire or electric shock.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in
connection with the furnishing or
use of this information.
NOTICE TO U.S.
GOVERNMENT USERS:
RESTRICTED RIGHTS
COMMERCIAL COMPUTER
SOFTWARE: “Use, duplication,
or disclosure by the
Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in
subparagraph (c) (1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data Clause
at DFARS 52.227-7013.”
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
WARNING!
Potential Shock Hazard
1
Read and understand all
instructions in the user
guide.
2
Observe all warnings and
instructions marked on the
product.
3
Use only a grounded
electrical outlet when
connecting the
HP LaserJet 3300mfp
product to a power source.
If you don’t know whether
the outlet is grounded,
check with a qualified
electrician.
4
Do not touch the contacts
on the end of any of the
sockets on the
HP LaserJet 3300mfp.
Replace damaged cords
immediately.
Information regarding FCC
Class B, Parts 15 and 68
requirements can be found in
the user guide.:
Contents
1 Product information
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and side view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back and side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model and serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refilled print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recycling print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IC CS-03 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory information for EU countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
16
16
16
17
18
19
19
22
23
24
25
25
25
26
27
27
28
2 Operation
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying the control panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To send a fax to one recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To receive faxes when you hear fax tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphanumeric buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu and cancel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy, scan, and start controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To print the control panel menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To use the control panel keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product media specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported media sizes (printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for using media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper and Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common media problems table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
29
30
31
31
31
32
33
34
34
35
35
35
38
45
45
46
46
46
47
Contents 3
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card stock and heavy media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading media to print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting originals for the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media information for the flatbed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading originals to copy or scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To load originals into the ADF input tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer output paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
48
49
49
50
51
51
51
52
54
3 Maintenance
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life expectancies of parts that wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the lid backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the print path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the print cartridge area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the printer pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-replaceable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the printer pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a new ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To install a new or replacement ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing an ADF pick roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
56
56
57
57
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
63
65
67
67
69
71
4 Operational overview
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Interface Unit (LIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner formatter PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash memory or ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Boot Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel interface or Universal Serial Bus interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draft mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
74
76
76
76
76
77
77
78
78
78
78
78
79
4 Contents
EN
PJL overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Scanner and ADF functions and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Scanner Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Scanner Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ADF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ADF paper path and ADF sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ADF Jam Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Printer functions and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Engine control unit/power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Image formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Printer paper-feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Basic sequence of operation (formatter-to-printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LIU (fax) functions and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
PSTN operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The fax subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Formatter in the fax subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LIU in the fax subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fax page storage in flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5 Removal and replacement
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and replacement strategy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before performing service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts removal order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Separation of scanner from printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner side covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat lid or ADF assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The ADF pick roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF document feed guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel bezel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF scanner glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
107
109
109
110
110
111
113
113
115
119
119
120
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
129
130
132
133
137
Contents 5
Transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Interface Unit (LIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pickup assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper lift-plate assembly and pickup roller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right plate assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left plate assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left bottom frame support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECU fuses and ECU pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper-feed assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
141
142
144
148
150
151
153
155
157
160
162
163
163
164
168
6 Troubleshooting
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Critical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving image-quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving paper-feed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving print paper-feed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving scanner (copier) paper-feed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half self-test functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum rotation functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating element check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-voltage power supply check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper path check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating or recovering the firmware code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware update via flash executable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware recovery DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing all fax reports at once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T.30 protocol trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secondary service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developer’s menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVRAM init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Contents
173
174
178
178
185
187
188
197
197
199
200
200
201
202
203
204
206
207
207
207
209
209
209
210
229
229
230
233
EN
PJL software commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repetitive image defect ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations of connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations of connectors and switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
236
237
239
240
7 Parts and diagrams
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering parts and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related documentation and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts that wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to use the parts lists and diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner and ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF rollers and separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
242
242
242
242
243
244
245
246
246
248
249
252
252
253
254
254
256
258
260
262
264
266
271
Index
EN
Contents 7
8 Contents
EN
Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
Figure 21.
Figure 22.
Figure 23.
Figure 24.
Figure 25.
Figure 26.
Figure 27.
Figure 28.
Figure 29.
Figure 30.
Figure 31.
Figure 32.
Figure 33.
Figure 34.
Figure 35.
Figure 36.
Figure 37.
Figure 38.
Figure 39.
Figure 40.
Figure 41.
EN
Front and side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Back and side view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Model and serial number labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dimensions of product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fax controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Alphanumeric controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Menu and cancel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Copy, scan, and start controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Output bin and straight-through output path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Product configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Optical diagram of scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Document scanner path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Printer unit functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ECU loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Overview of laser/scanner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
High-voltage power supply circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Image formation block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Printer paper path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Solenoid, photosensors, and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Printer timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Removing the print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Removing the right side cover (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Removing the right side cover (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Removing the right side cover (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Removing the right scanner cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Removing the left scanner cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Separating the scanner from the printer (1 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Separating the scanner from the printer (2 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Separating the scanner from the printer (3 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Separating the scanner from the printer (4 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Removing the ADF assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Removing the document feed guide (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing the document feed guide (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing the ADF separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Removing the control panel bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Reinstalling the control panel bezel (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Reinstalling the control panel bezel (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Removing the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Removing the control panel chassis (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Removing the control panel chassis (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Removing the scanner formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figures 9
Figure 42.
Figure 43.
Figure 44.
Figure 45.
Figure 46.
Figure 47.
Figure 48.
Figure 49.
Figure 50.
Figure 51.
Figure 52.
Figure 53.
Figure 54.
Figure 55.
Figure 56.
Figure 57.
Figure 58.
Figure 59.
Figure 60.
Figure 61.
Figure 62.
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68.
Figure 69.
Figure 70.
Figure 71.
Figure 72.
Figure 73.
Figure 74.
Figure 75.
Figure 76.
Figure 77.
Figure 78.
Figure 79.
Figure 80.
Figure 81.
Figure 82.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
10 Figures
Removing the ADF scanner glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the ADF scanner glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the left side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the back cover (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the back cover (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the printer top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the print cartridge door (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the print cartridge door (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the front cover (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cover removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the front cover (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the front guide assembly (1 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the front guide assembly (2 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the front guide assembly (3 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the left and right support covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the LIU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the formatter (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the formatter (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the formatter (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fuser assembly (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fuser assembly (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fuser assembly (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fuser assembly (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the output rollers (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the output rollers (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the solenoid (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the solenoid (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fan (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fan (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the pickup assembly plate (1 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the pickup assembly plate (2 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the pickup assembly plate (3 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the paper lift-plate assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the paper lift-plate assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the paper lift-plate assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper lift-plate springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the pickup roller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the right plate assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the right plate assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the left plate assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the left bottom frame support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the ECU pan (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the ECU pan (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the ECU pan (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the ECU pan (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
135
136
137
138
138
139
140
141
142
143
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
156
157
158
158
159
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
165
166
EN
Figure 89.
Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92.
Figure 93.
Figure 94.
Figure 95.
Figure 96.
Figure 97.
Figure 98.
Figure 99.
Figure 100.
Figure 101.
Figure 102.
Figure 103.
Figure 104.
Figure 105.
Figure 106.
Figure 107.
Figure 108.
Figure 109.
Figure 110.
Figure 111.
Figure 112.
Figure 113.
Figure 114.
Figure 115.
Figure 116.
Figure 117.
Figure 118.
Figure 119.
Figure 120.
EN
Removing the ECU pan (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the paper-feed assembly (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the paper-feed assembly (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the paper-feed mechanism (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the paper-feed mechanism (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine test switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating connectors for the heating element check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print cartridge high-voltage connection points (right side) . . . . . . . . .
Print cartridge high-voltage connection points (left side) . . . . . . . . . .
High-voltage connector assembly (right side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-voltage connector assembly (left side). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overriding SW301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the firmware recovery DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a T.30 trace of a successfully sent fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a T.30 trace of a successfully received fax . . . . . . . . . . .
NVRAM PJL factory variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repetitive image defect ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main wiring (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main wiring (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations of printer connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations of connectors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner covers and ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF rollers and separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
168
169
170
171
200
203
204
204
205
205
206
208
227
228
234
236
237
238
239
240
246
248
249
252
253
254
256
258
260
262
264
Figures 11
12 Figures
EN
Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.
Table 14.
Table 15.
Table 16.
Table 17.
Table 18.
Table 19.
Table 20.
Table 21.
Table 22.
Table 23.
Table 24.
Table 25.
Table 26.
Table 27.
Table 28.
Table 29.
Table 30.
Table 31.
Table 32.
Table 33.
Table 34.
Table 35.
Table 36.
Table 37.
Table 38.
Table 39.
Table 40.
Table 41.
EN
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Performance of HP LaserJet 3300mfp series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Performance of ADF for copying/scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic emissions (HP LaserJet 3300mfp series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Skew specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HP LaserJet 3330 fax specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Control panel menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Control panel error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Media types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Life expectancies of parts that wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Product startup messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Basic sequence of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Basic troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Alert and warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Critical error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Solving print image-quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Solving scanning (copying) image-quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Solving print paper-feed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Solving scanner paper-feed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fax receive error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fax send error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fax phase sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Appropriate responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fax abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Country/region codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Technical support websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Common fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Scanner and ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
ADF rollers and separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Control panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Printer covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Internal components (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Internal components (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Tables 13
Table 42.
Table 43.
Table 44.
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
14 Chapter - Tables
EN
1
Product information
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back and side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model and serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refilled print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recycling print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) . . . . . . . . . . . .
IC CS-03 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory information for EU countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
16
16
16
17
18
19
19
22
23
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
Chapter contents 15
Introduction
The HP LaserJet 3300mfp series is designed to:
Print: Print documents easily with the laser-quality you have
come to expect from an HP LaserJet product.
Copy: Make superior laser-quality copies. With the software, you
can make up to 99 copies of a 50-page original. You can also
enlarge, reduce, adjust contrast, and collate.
Scan: Scan documents to create electronic text or graphics files.
Fax: On the HP 3330, send and receive documents via standard
fax communications.
Overview of product
Front and side view
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
9
12
8
10
Figure 1.
11
Front and side view
1
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2
ADF media input tray
3
Side media guides for the ADF
4
Long media extension for the ADF
5
Control panel
6
Output bin
16 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
7
Print cartridge door
8
Priority input tray
9
Side media guides for the priority input tray
10 Media support for the main input tray
11 Main input tray
12 Side media guides for the main input tray (inside cover, not
shown)
Back and side view
1
2
7
3
6
5
Figure 2.
EN
4
Back and side view
1
Left side panel
2
Straight-through output door
3
USB port
4
Parallel port
5
Power receptacle
6
Power switch (220-240 volt units)
7
LIU (hp LaserJet 3330mfp only...not shown in graphic)
Overview of product 17
Hardware description
The product provides 1200 dot-per-inch (dpi) printing. The flatbed
scanner scans at 600 pixels-per-inch (ppi) with 24-bits per pixel (bpp)
and most models contain an automatic document feeder (ADF) that
holds up to 50 pages. On the HP LaserJet 3330mfp, the formatter
and LIU provide Group-3-compatible faxing capabilities.
The product prints 15 pages per minute (ppm) on letter-size paper or
14 ppm on A4. With 1200 dpi printing resolution, the product has
exceptional text and graphics print quality. The simple control panel
and improved paper handling make this product very easy to use.
The main input tray has a 250-sheet capacity for continuous, multiplepage printing. The priority input tray allows for manual feed of up to
ten sheets. Both trays are center-justified for all supported paper
sizes. The output bin holds up to 125 sheets.
The product has a very fast first-page-out, at less than ten seconds.
The formatter board contains 4 MB of ROM, 32 MB of RAM, and an
embedded 32-bit Coldfire V3 processor. There is one DIMM slot
available for font or memory expansion (supporting an 8 MB, 16 MB,
32 MB, or 64 MB DIMM).
The print engine has a 1,000 average (10,000 peak) page-per-month
duty cycle. The standard toner life is 2,500 pages, and the highcapacity toner life is 3,500 pages with 5% toner coverage.
18 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Firmware description
The firmware in the product includes:
Enhanced PCL 6 with status readback
80 PCL and 80 Postscript™ fonts
Pixel placement, mosaic characters
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) with hardware
compression and decompression
The firmware also has REt and EconoMode functionality.
Product Specifications
Table 1. Physical specifications
Category
Specification
Height
496 mm (19.5 inches)
Depth
520.7 mm (20.5 inches)
Width
546.1 mm (21.5 inches)
Weight (cartridge
installed)
15.9 kg (35.0 lbs) (models with ADF)
14.1 kg (31.1 lbs) (models without ADF)
Table 2. Environmental specifications
Category
Specification
Operating
environment (unit
plugged into an AC
outlet)
Storage environment
(unit not plugged
into an AC outlet)
Temperature: 15° to 32.5° C (59° to 90.5° F)
Humidity: 10% to 80% relative humidity
(no condensation)
Temperature: -20° to 40° C (-4° to 104° F)
Humidity: Less than 95% relative humidity
(no condensation)
Table 3. Performance of HP LaserJet 3300mfp series
EN
Category
Specification
Print resolution
1200 dpi
Print speed
15 ppm (Letter)
14 ppm (A4)
Product Specifications 19
Table 4. Performance of ADF for copying/scanning
Category
Specification
Scan resolution
600 PPI (24-bit pixels per inch) optical, with 256
levels of gray and 24-bit color
Copy speed
Up to 15 ppm
Table 5. Electrical specifications
110-V Models
220-V Models
Power requirements
Note: Power sources are not
interchangeable.
110 to 127 volts +/-10%
50 to 60 Hz +/-2 Hz
220 to 240V +/-10%,
50 to 60 Hz +/-2 Hz
Minimum recommended
circuit capacity
4.5 A at 115 V
2.3 A at 230 V
Power consumption
Copying (maximum): 330 W
Printing (maximum): 300 W
Standby: 14 Watts
Power save: 14 Watts
Copying (maximum): 330 W
Printing (maximum): 300 W
Standby: 14 Watts
Power save: 14 Watts
Off: 0 Watts
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/lj3300 for current information
Table 6. Acoustic emissions (HP LaserJet 3300mfp series)
Sound Power Level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing (maximum)
Copying (maximum)
Standby/PowerSave
LWAd = 6.1 Bels (A)
LWAd = 6.6 Bels (A)
Essentially inaudible
SPL Bystander Position
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing (maximum)
Copying (maximum)
Standby/PowerSave
LpAm = 48 dB (A)
LpAm = 50 dB (A)
Essentially inaudible
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/lj3300 for current information. During
other operations, acoustic emissions may vary.
20 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Table 7. Skew specifications
Category
Specification
Print skew
0.87% (1.65 mm over 190 mm in width) for
cut-sheet media (leading edge)
0.80% (2.0 mm over 250 mm in length) for
cut-sheet media except A5 size
1.50% (3.3 mm over 220 mm in length) for
envelopes, postcards, and A5-size media
The media registration defines how a sheet of media is positioned relative to the
electrophotographic image on the drum. The specified tolerances do not include variation in the
media dimensions from nominal. All vertical lines will be parallel to the reference, or left edge of the
media, within the specifications.
Table 8. HP LaserJet 3330 fax specifications
EN
Category
Specification
Fax transmission speed
3 seconds/page (ITU-T Test Image #1)
Right/left margins for printed
pages
6.3 mm (0.25 inch)
Top/bottom margins for printed
pages
5.08 mm (0.2 inch)
Fax compatibility
ITU Group 3; ECM
Fax coding schemes
MH, MR, and MMR
Modem speed
Up to 33,600 bits per second (bps)
Speed dialing
Yes
Distinctive ring detect
Yes
Fax resolution (standard)
203 by 98 dots per inch (dpi)
Fax resolution (fine)
203 by 196 dpi
Fax resolution (superfine)
300 by 300 dpi (no halftone)
Fax resolution (photo)
300 by 300 dpi (halftone enabled)
Product Specifications 21
Model and serial numbers
The model number and serial number are listed on an identification
label located on the inside of the print cartridge door.
The serial number contains information about the country/region of
origin, revision level, production code, and production number of
the product.
The label also contains power rating and regulatory information.
Figure 3.
Model and serial number labels
22 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Warranty statement
DURATION OF WARRANTY: One year from date of purchase.
1
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware, accessories, and
supplies, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of
purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products
which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like
new.
2
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming
instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to
defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If
HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace
software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such
defects.
3
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or
error-free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any
product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the
purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
4
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance
or may have been subject to incidental use.
5
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate
maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts, or supplies not
supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of
the published environmental specifications for the product, or (d) improper site
preparation or maintenance.
6
HP MAKES NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER
WRITTEN OR ORAL. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH
ABOVE. Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow limitations on the
duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have
other rights that vary from country to country, state to state, or province to
province.
EN
Warranty statement 23
7
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER
DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some
countries, states, or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to
you.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, THE
WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE
EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR
MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS
APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Extended warranty
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product and
all HP-supplied internal components. The hardware maintenance
warranty covers a three-year period from the date of the HP product
purchase. The customer must purchase the HP SupportPack within
90 days of the HP product purchase. Customers can contact the
nearest HP-authorized dealer about this service.
24 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Print cartridge information
The print cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major
consumable parts. The print cartridge contains the printing
mechanism and a supply of toner.
At five percent page coverage, a standard print cartridge will print
approximately 2,500 pages. However, a cartridge should print more
pages if it regularly prints pages with less coverage, such as short
memos. The cartridge might print fewer pages if heavy or bold print is
used.
For best results, always use a print cartridge before the expiration
date stamped on the cartridge box.
Refilled print cartridges
While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled print
cartridges during the warranty period or while the product is under a
maintenance contract, it is not recommended for the following
reasons:
Repairs resulting from the use of refilled cartridges are not
covered under Hewlett-Packard warranty or maintenance
contracts.
Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a
refilled cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new
HP LaserJet toner cartridge. Hewlett-Packard also cannot predict
the long-term reliability effect on the product from using different
toner formulations found in refilled cartridges.
The print quality of HP LaserJet print cartridges influences the
customer’s perception of the product. Hewlett-Packard has no
control over the actual print quality of a refilled cartridge.
Parts that are critical to print quality may not be replaced when
the cartridge is refilled with toner.
Recycling print cartridges
In order to reduce waste, Hewlett-Packard offers a recycling program.
Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled. Plastics and
other materials are recycled. Hewlett-Packard pays the shipping
EN
Print cartridge information 25
costs from the user to the recycling plant (within the United States).
To join this recycling effort, follow the instructions inside the print
cartridge box.
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US)
This equipment complies with FCC rules, Part 68. On the back of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC
registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this
equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the
telephone company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of
devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive
RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in
response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of
the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of
devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total
RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum
REN for the calling area.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with
this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the
telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular
jack which is Part 68-compliant. This equipment cannot be used on
telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line
Service is subject to state tariffs. If this equipment causes harm to the
telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance
notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon
as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint
with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company
may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this
happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order
for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain
uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment,
please contact HP for repair and (or) warranty information. If the
trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company may request that you remove the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved. The following repairs can be
done by the customer: replace any original equipment that came with
the product. This includes the print cartridge, the paper trays, the
ADF, the control panel bezel, the ADF pick roller assembly, the power
cord, and the telephone cord. It is recommended that the customer
26 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful
for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including
fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or
on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the
message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such
business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided
cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which charges
exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) In order to
program this information into your facsimile, please see the HP
3300mfp User Guide.
IC CS-03 requirements
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment.
This certification means the equipment meets certain
telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment
Technical Requirement document(s). The Department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before
installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for
the equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed
using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified
equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own
protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present,
are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important
in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections
themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection
authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence
Number (REN) of this device is 0.7.
EN
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US) 27
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each
terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of
terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0).
The standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for
equipment with direct connections to the telephone network is
CA11A.
Regulatory information for EU countries
This equipment has been designed to work in all of the countries of
the European Economic Area (Public Switched Telephone Networks)
only. Network compatibility is dependent on internal software settings.
Contact your equipment supplier if it is necessary to use the
equipment on a different telephone network. For further product
support, contact Hewlett-Packard at the phone numbers provided in
the support flyer that came with the product.
28 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
2
Operation
Chapter contents
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying the control panel components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To send a fax to one recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To receive faxes when you hear fax tones . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphanumeric buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu and cancel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy, scan, and start controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To print the control panel menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To use the control panel keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported media sizes (printer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for using media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper and Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common media problems table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card stock and heavy media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading media to print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting originals for the ADF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media information for the flatbed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading originals to copy or scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . .
To load originals into the ADF input tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer output paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
30
31
31
31
32
33
34
34
35
35
35
38
45
45
46
46
46
47
47
48
49
49
50
51
51
51
52
54
Chapter contents 29
Operating environment
Place the product on a sturdy, level surface in a well-ventilated area
that meets the following environmental requirements:
temperature: 15° to 32.5° C (59° to 90.5° F)
humidity: 10% to 80% relative humidity (no condensation)
away from direct sunlight, open flames, and ammonia fumes
sufficient space around the product to allow for proper access
and ventilation
74 cm (29 in)
53 cm (21 in)
Figure 4.
81 cm (32 in)
Dimensions of product
30 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Identifying the control panel components
Fax controls
Fax capability is available on the HP LaserJet 3330 product only. Use
the fax controls to send and receive faxes. These controls and the fax
menu or software are used to change commonly used fax settings.
Figure 5.
Fax controls
The HP 3330 has extensive faxing capabilities. This manual
describes only sending a fax to one recipient and receiving a fax. For
a full description of the fax capabilities, see “Faxing” in the User
Guide on the product CD.
To send a fax to one recipient
1
Dial the fax number using one of the following methods:
• Use the alphanumeric buttons on the product’s control panel.
• If the fax number you are calling has been assigned to a onetouch key, press that key.
• If the fax number you are calling has a speed-dial code, press
speed dial, enter the speed-dial code using the alphanumeric
buttons, and press menu/enter.
Note
EN
When dialing with the alphanumeric buttons, include any pauses
or other needed numbers, such as an area code, an access code
for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or 0), or a longdistance prefix. For more information, see “Using dialing
characters” in the User Guide on the product CD.
Identifying the control panel components 31
2
Load the document into the ADF input tray.
3
Press fax/send.
When the last page of the fax has exited the product, you can start
sending another fax, copying, or scanning.
To fax to numbers you use regularly, you can assign a one-touch key
or speed-dial code as described in the User Guide on the product CD.
If you have electronic phone books available, you may be able to use
them for selecting recipients. Electronic phone books are generated
with third-party applications.
Note
If you want to improve the quality of a paper document before faxing
it, scan the document, straighten or clean the image, and send it
as a fax from the software. For more information, see the product
software Help.
To receive faxes when you hear fax tones
In general, incoming faxes to the product are automatically received.
However, if other devices are connected to the same phone line, the
product may not be set to answer automatically.
If the product is connected to a phone line that receives both fax and
phone calls, and you hear fax tones when you answer the extension
phone, receive the fax in one of two ways:
Note
If you are near the product, press fax/send on the control panel.
Press 1-2-3 in sequence on the extension phone keypad, listen
for fax transmission sounds, then hang up.
For the 1-2-3 sequence to work, the extension phone setting must
be set to Yes in the fax menu.
32 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Alphanumeric buttons
On the HP 3330, use the alphanumeric buttons to enter fax data into
the product’s display screen and dial phone numbers for faxing. For a
full description on using alphanumeric key characters, see “Using
Dialing Characters” in the User Guide on the product CD.
Figure 6.
Note
EN
Alphanumeric controls
Keypad buttons are numeric on non-fax models and alphanumeric
on the HP LaserJet 3330mfp.
Identifying the control panel components 33
Menu and cancel controls
Use these controls to choose menu options, determine the product’s
status, and cancel the current job.
Figure 7.
Menu and cancel buttons
Copy, scan, and start controls
Use these controls to change commonly used default settings, to start
scanning, and to start copying. For instructions on copying, see
“Copying” in the User Guide. For instructions on scanning, see
“Scanning” in the User Guide. The User Guide is located on the
product CD.
Figure 8.
Copy, scan, and start controls
34 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Control panel menu structure
A hierarchical diagram of the control panel menu structure follows.
Refer to this menu structure to make changes to settings and
features.
To print the control panel menu structure
1
Press menu/enter.
2
Use the < or > key to select Reports and then press menu/
enter.
3
Use the < or > key to select Menu Structure and then press
menu/enter. The product exits the Menu settings and prints the
report.
To see which settings are currently selected, print a configuration
report.
To use the control panel keys
EN
1
Press menu/enter to begin.
2
Use the < or > key to select one of the choices from the main
Menu, and then press menu/enter.
3
Use the < or > key to select one of the choices from the submenu
and press menu/enter.
4
If applicable, use the < or > key to select one of the choices from
the second submenu and press menu/enter.
Control panel menu structure 35
Table 9. Control panel menu structure
Main Menu
Submenu
Submenu
Fax Job Status
Fax Functions .............. Send Fax Later
Stop Recv To PC
Reprint Last
Polling Receive
Clear Saved Faxes
Time/Date, Header ...... Time/Date
Fax Header
Copy Setup.................. Default Quality
Def. Light/Dark
Def. Collation
Def. # Of Copies
Def. Redu/Enlrg
Reports ........................ Demo Page
Fax Activity Log.................... Print Log Now
Auto Log Print
Fax Call Report .................... Print Report Now
Print Report
Include 1st Page
PhoneBook Report
Menu Structure
Config Report
Block Fax List
PCL Font List
PS Font List
All Fax Reports
36 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Table 9. Control panel menu structure
Main Menu
Submenu
Submenu
Fax Setup .................... Phone Book ......................... Individual Setup
Add
Delete
Group Setup
Add Group
Delete Group
Del. # In Group
Delete All
Fax Send Setup ................... Def. Resolution
Def. Light/Dark
Dialing Mode
Redial On Busy
Redial-No Answer
Dial Prefix
Detect Dial Tone
Billing Codes
Fax Recv. Setup .................. Answer Mode
Rings To Answer
Answer Ring Type
Extension Phone
Silence Detection
Fit To Page
Stamp Faxes
Forward Fax
Block Faxes
Add Entry
Delete Entry
Clear All
All Faxes .............................. Error Correction
V. 34
Common Settings ........ Language
Def. Paper Size
Print Density
Volume Settings................... Alarm Volume
Ring Volume
Key Press Volume
Service......................... Print T.30 Trace
Restore Defaults
Cleaning Mode
Power Save Time
Less Paper Curl
EN
Control panel menu structure 37
Control panel error messages
These control panel error messages are listed alphabetically.
Messages are accompanied by the cause of the message and userlevel steps to resolve the problem.
Table 10. Control panel error messages
Message
Cause
Solution
The product is running an internal
cleaning cycle.
Wait for the product to finish the
cleaning cycle. The message will
clear when the cycle is finished.
The fax line to which you were
sending a fax was busy. The
product has cancelled sending
the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that
the fax machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the
correct fax number.
Check that the redial on busy
option is enabled.
Unplug the product telephone
cord from the wall, plug in a
telephone, and try making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into
a jack for another phone line.
See chapter 6, “Troubleshooting.
”
### Is Empty
[Enter] To Add
The one-touch key or speed-dial
code has not been programmed
and therefore cannot be added to
a group.
Press menu/enter to program
the one-touch or speed-dial. If
you want to program a groupdial, press cancel and use the
control panel menu to create a
new group. Press cancel if you
do not want to program the onetouch or speed-dial.
###: [Group Name]
Phbook/SpeedDial
The product is waiting for you to
press a programmed one-touch
key or enter a speed-dial code to
a group-dial code.
Begin adding fax numbers to the
group-dial code. See
“Programming group-dial codes”
in the User Guide on the product
CD.
50 Fuser Error
The product has experienced an
internal hardware error.
Disconnect the power cable from
the product, wait at least 20
minutes, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the
product to initialize. Try another
power source. If the message
does not clear, see chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
Cleaning Mode.
Wait 1-3 Min.
Fax Busy.
Canceled Send
38 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Table 10. Control panel error messages (continued)
Message
Cause
Solution
51 Laser Error
The product has experienced an
internal hardware error.
Disconnect the power cable from
the product, wait at least 30
seconds, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the
product to initialize. Try another
power source. If the message
does not clear, see chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
52 Scanner Error
The product has experienced an
internal code error.
Disconnect the power cable from
the product, wait at least 30
seconds, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the
product to initialize. Try another
power source. If the message
does not clear, see chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
79 Error
PowerOff>PowerOn
The product has experienced an
internal hardware error.
Disconnect the power cable from
the product, wait at least 30
seconds, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the
product to initialize. If the
message does not clear, see
chapter 6, “Troubleshooting.”
The ADF door is open or a
sensor is malfunctioning.
Make sure the ADF door is
closed. If the message persists,
disconnect the power cable from
the product, wait at least 30
seconds, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the
product to initialize. Try another
power source. If the message
does not clear, see chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
Canceled Copy.
Clear Document
The cancel key was pressed to
cancel the current job while
pages were feeding from the
document feeder. The cancel
process will not automatically
clear the document feeder.
Pull the document release door
open, remove the jammed item,
and close the door. Then, clear
the items in the document feeder
tray and start over.
Canceled Scan.
Clear Document
The cancel key was pressed to
cancel the current job while
pages were feeding from the
document feeder. The cancel
process will not automatically
clear the document feeder.
Pull the document release door
open, remove the jammed item,
and close the door. Then, clear
the items in the document feeder
tray and start over.
ADF Door Open
EN
Control panel error messages 39
Table 10. Control panel error messages (continued)
Message
Cause
Solution
The cancel key was pressed to
cancel the current job while
pages were feeding from the
document feeder. The cancel
process will not automatically
clear the document feeder.
Pull the document release door
open, remove the jammed item,
and close the door. Then, clear
the items in the document feeder
tray and start over.
CCD Scanner Error
The scanner assembly
experienced an internal error.
Disconnect the power cable from
the product, wait at least 30
seconds, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the
product to initialize. Try another
power source. If the message
does not clear, see chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
Comm. Error
Fax communication error
occurred between the product
and the sender or receiver.
Allow the product to retry sending
the fax.
Unplug the product telephone
cord from the wall, plug in a
telephone, and try making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into
a jack for another phone line.
See chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
Device Busy.
Try Again Later
The product is currently in use.
Wait for the product to finish the
current job.
There was an internal error in the
product.
Press menu/enter to resume the
job.
Doc Feeder Jam
A piece of media is jammed in
the document feeder tray.
Open the document release
door, clear the jam, close the
document release door, and
reload the paper into the
document feeder tray.
Document Feeder
Mispick. Reload
Media in the document feeder
tray was not picked up.
Remove and reload the media
into the document feeder tray.
Door Open Or No
Print Cartridge
The print cartridge door is open
or the print cartridge is not
installed properly.
Make sure the print cartridge
door is closed. Check the print
cartridge for proper installation.
The product experienced an
internal communication error.
Warning message only. Job
output may be affected.
Canceled Send.
Clear Document
Device Error.
[Enter] To Cont.
Engine Comm. Error
40 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Table 10. Control panel error messages (continued)
Message
EN
Cause
Solution
Fax Busy.
Redial Pending
The fax line to which you were
sending a fax was busy. The
product automatically redials the
busy number. (See “Changing
how the product redials” in the
User Guide on the product CD.)
Allow the product to retry sending
the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that
the fax machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the
correct fax number.
Unplug the product telephone
cord from the wall, plug in a
telephone, and try making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into
a jack for another phone line.
See chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
Fax Memory Full
Canceling Recv
During the fax transmission, the
product ran out of memory. Only
the pages that fit into memory will
be printed.
Print all of the faxes and have the
sender resend the fax. Cancel all
fax jobs or clear the faxes from
memory (see “Clearing faxes
from memory” in the User Guide
on the product CD).
Fax Memory Full
Canceling Send
During the fax job, the memory
filled. All pages of the fax have to
be in memory for a fax job to
work correctly. Only the pages
that fit into memory were sent.
Print all received faxes or wait
until all pending faxes are sent.
Cancel all fax jobs or clear the
faxes from memory (see
“Clearing faxes from memory” in
the User Guide on the product
CD).
Fax Recv Error
An error occurred while trying to
receive a fax.
Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Try faxing back to sender or
another fax machine.
Check that the telephone cord is
securely connected by
unplugging and replugging the
cord.
Check for a dial tone on the
phone line by pressing fax/send.
Make sure the phone is working
by disconnecting the product,
plugging in a telephone to the
phone line, and making a voice
call.
Connect the product to a different
phone line.
Control panel error messages 41
Table 10. Control panel error messages (continued)
Message
Cause
Solution
Fax Send Error
An error occurred while trying to
send a fax.
Try resending the fax.
Try faxing to another fax number.
Check that the telephone cord is
securely connected by
unplugging and replugging the
cord.
Check for a dial tone on the
phone line by pressing fax/send.
Make sure the phone is working
by disconnecting the product,
plugging in a telephone to the
phone line, and making a voice
call.
Connect the product to a different
phone line.
Fit to Page on
Flatbed Only
Fit to Page does not work when
the ADF is being used.
Use the flatbed or choose
another reduction/enlargement
setting.
Group Dial Not
Allowed In Group
The speed-dial code you entered
is programmed for a group.
Adding a group-dial to another
group-dial is not allowed.
Enter one-touch keys
(programmed as an individual
speed dial) or speed-dial codes
to a group-dial
Group Is Full.
[Fax] To Start
The maximum number of fax
numbers that can be added to an
ad hoc group is 20.
Resend to the ad hoc group
using less fax numbers.
An invalid date was entered,
such as June 35.
Reenter the date.
Invalid data or response.
Correct the entry.
Memory Low.
Press [Cancel]
The product memory has been
almost completely filled.
Allow the product to finish the job
or press cancel to cancel the job.
Memory Low.1 Copy.
Press [Cancel]
The product completed making
one copy. The remaining copies
have been canceled because of
low product memory.
Press cancel to clear the error.
Use the HP LaserJet Director to
make multiple copies of large
documents, or break the job into
smaller jobs containing fewer
pages.
Memory Low
Only 1 Copy Made
The product does not have
enough memory to complete the
collated copy job.
Reduce job size or copy one at a
time.
Invalid Date
Invalid Entry
42 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Table 10. Control panel error messages (continued)
Message
Cause
Solution
The product could not detect a
dial tone.
Unplug the telephone cord from
both the product and the wall and
replug the cord.
Unplug the product telephone
cord from the wall, plug in a
telephone, and try making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into
a jack for another phone line.
See “Changing the detect dial
tone setting” in the User Guide
on the product CD. Also see
chapter 6, “Troubleshooting.”
No Document Sent
The fax forwarding setting is on
and the product was
unsuccessful at receiving a fax
because of low memory or some
other reason. The product
deleted the partially received fax
data and did not attempt to
forward it.
Print the faxes in memory and
have the sender resend the
missing page(s) of the document.
No Fax Answer.
Canceled Send
Attempts to redial a fax number
failed or the “Redial on no
answer” option was turned off.
Call the recipient to ensure that
the fax machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the
correct fax number. Check that
the redial option is enabled.
Unplug the telephone cord from
both the product and the wall and
replug the cord. Unplug the
product telephone cord from the
wall, plug in a telephone, and try
making a call. Plug the product
phone cord into a jack for another
phone line. See chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
No Fax Answer.
Redial Pending
You tried to send a fax, but the
receiving fax line did not answer.
The product attempts to redial
after a few minutes.
Allow the product to retry sending
the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that
the fax machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the
correct fax number.
Check that the redial on no
answer option is enabled.
Unplug the product telephone
cord from the wall, plug in a
telephone, and try making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into
a jack for another phone line.
See chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
No Dial Tone.
EN
Control panel error messages 43
Table 10. Control panel error messages (continued)
Message
Cause
Solution
The product answered the
incoming call but did not detect
that a fax machine was calling.
Allow the product to retry
receiving the fax.
Unplug the product telephone
cord from the wall, plug in a
telephone, and try making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into
a jack for another phone line.
See chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
No Fax Pages
To Reprint
The product attempted to
execute “Reprint Last Fax” when
nothing was in memory.
Receive a fax before attempting
to use this option.
Not Enough
Memory.Try Later
There is not enough memory to
start a new job.
Wait until the current job is
finished before starting a new
job.
Out of Range
An invalid number was entered.
Correct the entry.
Printer Jam.
Clear Paper Path
The product has detected that a
jam has occurred.
Clear the jam. The job should
continue to print. If it does not, try
reprinting the job.
Printer Mispick
[Enter]To Resume
The print engine has failed to
pick up a piece of media.
Reload the paper in the paper
input tray and press menu/enter
to continue the job.
Printer Tray Is
Empty.Add Paper
The paper input tray is empty.
Load media. If media is already
loaded, remove it. Check for and
remove any jam, and then reload
the stack of media in the paper
input tray.
The scanner assembly
experienced an error in scanner
bulb functionality.
Disconnect the power cable from
the product, wait at least 30
seconds, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the
product to initialize. Try another
power source. If the message
does not clear, see chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting.”
The product is being used to
create a scan by a computer.
Wait until the PC scan has
finished, or cancel the scan from
the computer software, or press
cancel.
The product cannot transmit scan
information to a computer.
Check the connection cable and
try the scan again.
The product has cleared job
settings.
Reenter any desired job settings.
Invalid date or time entry.
Enter the correct time or date.
No Fax Detected
Scanner Bulb Failure
Scanner Reserved
For PC Scan
Scanning Error.
Cannot Connect
Settings Cleared
Time/Date is in Past.
Try Again
44 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Product media specifications
The product accepts a variety of media. Properties such as weight,
grain, and moisture content are important factors affecting printer
performance and output quality. Media should conform to the
guidelines in the User Guide located on the product CD. Media that
does not meet HP guidelines might cause poor print quality,
increased media jams, or premature wear on the product. This may
require repair.
CAUTION
Damage caused by media that does not meet HP’s specifications
is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements.
Supported media sizes (printer)
The printer supports media within these sizes:
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in)
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Table 11. Media types
Note
EN
Paper type
Metric
English
Letter
216 by 279 mm
8.5 by 11 in
Legal
216 by 356 mm
8.5 by 14 in
Executive
184 by 267 mm
7.25 by 10.5 in
A4
210 by 297 mm
8.25 by 11.75 in
COM10 Envelopes
105 by 241 mm
4.13 by 9.5 in
DL Envelopes
110 by 220 mm
4.33 by 8.67 in
C5 Envelopes
162 by 229 mm
6.4 by 9 in
B5 Envelopes
176 by 250 mm
6.9 by 9.85 in
Monarch Envelopes
98.5 by 191 mm
3.88 by 7.5 in
Custom size media
custom
custom
Narrow and heavy media can cause the printer to print slower.
Product media specifications 45
Guidelines for using media
Paper and Transparencies
Paper must be of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots,
loose particles, dust, wrinkles, holes, and curled or bent edges.
Check the label on the paper package for details about the type of
paper (such as bond or recycled).
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to
the printer.
Note
Do not use letterhead that is printed with low-temperature inks,
such as those used in some types of thermography, raised
letterhead, or colored paper or preprinted forms that use inks
incompatible with the printer temperature (200° C or 392° F for
0.1 second).
Transparencies must be able to withstand 200° C (392° F), the
printer’s maximum temperature.
Common media problems table
Symptom
Problem with paper
Solution
Poor print quality or toner
adhesion, or problems with
feeding.
Too moist, too rough, too
smooth, or embossed.
Try another kind of paper
between 100 and 250
Sheffield and 4 to 6%
moisture content.
Dropouts, jamming, or curl.
Stored improperly.
Store paper flat in its
moisture-proof wrapping.
Increased gray background
shading.
Might be too heavy.
Use lighter paper.
Excessive curl, or problems
with feeding.
Too moist, wrong grain
direction, or short-grain
construction.
Use long-grain paper.
Jamming, or damage to
printer.
Cutouts or perforations.
Do not use paper with cutouts
or perforations.
Problems with feeding.
Ragged edges.
Use good quality paper.
Faulty paper lot.
46 Chapter 2 - Operation
Print using the straightthrough output path.
EN
Labels
When selecting labels, consider the quality of the following factors:
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200° C
(392° F), the printer’s maximum temperature.
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between
them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the
labels, causing serious jams.
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than
13 mm (0.5 in) of curl in any direction.
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation. Never use a sheet of labels that has
already been run through the printer.
Envelopes
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary
considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box
from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes
depends on the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,
consider the following factors:
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105
g/m2 (28 lb), or jamming might result.
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less
than 6 mm (0.25 in) curl and should not contain air. Envelopes
that trap air may cause problems.
Condition: Make sure that the envelopes are not wrinkled,
nicked, or otherwise damaged.
Sizes: From 90 x 160 mm (3.5 x 6.3 in) to 178 x 254 mm
(7 x 10 in).
Store envelopes flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air
bubble, the envelope might wrinkle during printing.
EN
Guidelines for using media 47
Envelopes with double-side seams
An envelope with double-side-seam construction (vertical seams at
both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal seams) is more likely
to wrinkle. Make sure the seam extends all the way to the corner of
the envelope as shown in the following illustration:
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap
that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat
and pressure in the printer: 200° C (392° F). The extra flaps and
strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
Card stock and heavy media
For optimum performance, do not use paper heavier than 157 g/m2
(42-pound). Paper that is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking
problems, paper jams, poor toner fusing, poor print quality, or
excessive mechanical wear.
Note
You might be able to print on heavier paper if you do not fill the
input tray to capacity and if you use paper with a smoothness rating
of 100 to 180 Sheffield.
48 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Card stock construction
Smoothness: 135-157 g/m2 (36-to 42-pound) card stock should
have a smoothness rating of 100 to 180 Sheffield. 60-135 g/m2
(16- to 36-pound) card stock should have a smoothness rating of
100 to 250 Sheffield.
Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm
(0.2 in) of curl.
Condition: Make sure that the card stock is not wrinkled, nicked,
or otherwise damaged.
Sizes: Only use card stock within the following size ranges:
• Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in)
• Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Card stock guidelines
If the card stock curls or jams, print using the straight-through
output path.
Set margins at least 2 mm (0.08 in) away from the edges.
Loading media
Loading media to print
Main input tray
The main input tray holds up to 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper or
a 25 mm (0.98 in) stack of heavier media. Load media with the top
forward and the side to be printed facing up. To prevent jams and
skew, always adjust the side media guides.
Priority input tray
The priority input tray holds up to ten pages of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper
or one envelope, transparency, or card. Load media with the top
forward and the side to be printed facing up. To prevent jams and
skew, always adjust the side media guides.
CAUTION
EN
If you try to print on media that is wrinkled, folded, or damaged in
any way, a jam might occur. See the User Guide located on the
product CD for more information.
Loading media 49
Note
When you add new media, make sure that you remove all of the
media from the input tray and straighten the stack of new media.
This helps prevent multiple sheets of media from feeding through
the printer at one time, reducing paper jams.
Specific types of media
Transparencies and labels: Load transparencies and labels
with the top forward and the side to be printed facing up. See the
User Guide located on the product CD for more information.
Envelopes: Load envelopes with the narrow, stamp side forward
and the side to be printed facing up. See the User Guide located
on the product CD for more information.
Letterhead or preprinted forms: Load with the top forward and
the side to be printed facing up. See the User Guide for more
information.
Cards and custom-sized media: Load with the narrow side
forward and the side to be printed facing up. See the User Guide
located on the product CD for more information.
Selecting originals for the ADF
The ADF is recommended for plain paper copying, scanning, and
faxing (faxing can be done only from the ADF).
Note
If you want to fax an original that is not appropriate for the ADF,
make a copy of it first on the flatbed, then fax the copy.
ADF originals specifications
Input capacity: The ADF holds up to 50 sheets of flat 60 to
90g/m (16- to 24-pound) plain paper.
Media size: Only use plain paper within the following size ranges:
• Minimum: 127 mm x 127 mm (5 x 5 in)
• Maximum: 215.9 mm x 381 mm (8.5 x 15 in)
Note
You must use the flatbed to scan or copy small or delicate originals
(such as newsprints, business cards, and photos), or documents
with tears, perforations, or punch holes. If you want to fax such
items, make a copy first on the flatbed and then fax the copy.
50 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
Perform the following actions to minimize the possibility of jams:
Remove self-stick notes.
Remove staples and paper clips.
Straighten any curls, folds, or wrinkles in documents before
putting them into the document feeder tray.
Do not insert any document with glue, correction fluid, or wet ink
on it.
Do not insert gum-backed paper or labels.
Avoid multiple-copy forms.
Do not scan originals that are larger or smaller than supported
size limitations. See the User Guide for more information.
Note
To obtain good results, it is important that you use the correct
resolution and color settings for your job. See the User Guide
located on the product CD for more information.
Media information for the flatbed
Use the flatbed scanner for copying and scanning if the media is
fragile, thin, thick, or damaged (folded, wrinkled). The flatbed scanner
provides the best copy and scan quality.
The flatbed has no minimum size and a maximum size of legal. In
order to make a copy of a legal-size document, the paper size must
be changed using the paper size button. Otherwise, the copy will be
cropped to the default paper size.
Loading originals to copy or scan
Use these instructions to load originals into your HP LaserJet
3300mfp series for copying or scanning. For the best-quality scans
and copies, use the flatbed scanner. See "Selecting originals for the
ADF" for guidelines on choosing original documents for scanning and
copying.
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3300mfp and want to purchase an
ADF, see the User Guide located on the product CD for more
information.
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner
1
EN
Make sure the ADF is free of media.
Media information for the flatbed 51
2
Lift the flatbed scanner cover.
3
Place the original document facedown on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right
corner of the glass.
4
Gently close the lid.
5
The document is ready to be copied or scanned.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the product, do not allow the scanner lid to
fall onto the flatbed scanner surface. Always close the scanner lid
when the product is not in use.
To load originals into the ADF input tray
ADF capacity is up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20-pound) media
(depending on the thickness of the media), or until the ADF input tray
is full.
The minimum size for media in the ADF is 127 x 127 mm (5 x 5 in).
For smaller sizes use the flatbed scanner. The maximum size for
media in the ADF is 215.9 mm wide by 381 mm long (8.5 x 15 in).
1
Make sure the flatbed scanner is free of media.
2
Close the flatbed scanner cover and put the top end of the
original media stack into the ADF input tray, with the media stack
faceup and the first page to be scanned, copied, or faxed on top
of the stack.
52 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
EN
3
Slide the media stack into the ADF until the media does not move
any farther.
4
Adjust the media guides until they are snug.
5
The document is now ready to be copied or scanned.
6
After scanning, the document will be delivered to the output tray
in the correct order.
Loading originals to copy or scan 53
Printer output paths
Output bin and straight-through output path
The output bin is located between the scanner and the printer. Printed
media is collected here in the correct sequence when the straightthrough output door is closed. Use the output bin when printing
normal and large collated documents.
The straight-through output path is useful when you are printing
envelopes, transparencies, heavy media, or any media that tends to
curl when printed. Printed media exits in reverse order when the
straight-through output door is open.
Figure 9.
Note
Output bin and straight-through output path
Printed media does not stack when you use the straight-through
output path. The media drops to the surface below unless you
remove each sheet as it exits the printer.
54 Chapter 2 - Operation
EN
3
Maintenance
Chapter contents
Life expectancies of parts that wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the lid backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the print path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the print cartridge area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the printer pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-replaceable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the printer pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a new ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To install a new or replacement ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing an ADF pick roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
56
56
57
57
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
63
65
67
67
69
71
Chapter contents 55
Life expectancies of parts that wear
Inspect any parts that wear when servicing the product. Replace
them as needed, based on failure or wear, rather than on usage.
The following table lists approximate schedules for replacing
consumables.
Table 12. Life expectancies of parts that wear
Description
Print cartridge* (userreplaceable)
Part number
Life (est.)
Remarks
C7115A
2,500 pages
C7115X
3,500 pages
When print becomes faint,
redistribute toner in the cartridge
by gently shaking the cartridge
from side to side.
Printer transfer roller
RG9-1483-000CN
25,000
pages
Can affect print quality and/or
paper movement.
Printer pickup roller
RF0-1008-000CN
25,000
pages
Look for glazing and/or cracks.
Printer separation pad
RF0-1014-020CN
25,000
pages
Can affect paper movement.
Fuser assembly
(100-127 V)
RG9-1493-030CN
25,000
pages
Can affect print quality and paper
movement.
Fuser assembly
(220-240 V)
RG9-1494-030CN
25,000
pages
Can affect print quality and paper
movement.
ADF separation pad
C7309-60009
25,000
pages
Can affect movement of
documents to be scanned or
copied.
ADF
C9143-60101
25,000
pages
Can affect movement of
documents to be scanned or
copied.
ADF pick roller assembly
C7309-60016
25,000
pages
Can affect movement of
documents to be scanned or
copied.
* The estimated print cartridge life is based on letter- or A4-sized paper with an average of five percent
toner coverage and a medium density setting. Print cartridge life can be extended further by conserving
toner using draft mode settings.
Scanner calibration
The scanner calibrates itself automatically at the start of scan of copy
jobs. Normally, you don’t need to initiate the calibration, but you can
initiate the calibration through the secondary service menu and
produce a report that shows the calibration results (page 229).
56 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
EN
Cleaning the product
WARNING!
Before you perform these steps, unplug the product to avoid shock
hazard.
To maintain quality, thoroughly clean the product:
Any time a new print cartridge is installed.
After printing approximately 2,500 pages.
Whenever print quality problems appear.
Clean the outside of the product with a water-dampened cloth. Clean
the inside with only a dry, lint-free cloth (such as a lens tissue).
To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use
ammonia-based or ethyl alcohol-based cleaners on or around the
product.
WARNING!
Avoid touching the heating element in the fuser. It might be very hot
and can cause burns.
CAUTION
Do not touch the surface of the black sponge transfer roller.
Contaminants on the roller can cause print quality problems.
Cleaning the exterior
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off
the exterior of the product.
Cleaning the glass
Dirty glass (from fingerprints, smudges, hair, and so on) reduces
quality, slows down performance, and affects the accuracy of special
features such as fit to page and copy.
1
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2
EN
Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical
socket, and raise the lid.
Clean the glass with a soft cloth or sponge slightly moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
Cleaning the product 57
CAUTION
Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on the glass; these can damage it. Do not place
liquids directly on the glass. They may seep under it and damage
the product.
3
Note
Dry the glass with a chamois or cellulose sponge to prevent
spotting.
Dust might appear on the underside of the glass, but this cannot
be cleaned and it has no effect on the copy or scan quality.
Cleaning the lid backing
Minor debris can accumulate on the white document lid backing
located underneath the product’s lid.
1
Note
Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical
socket, and raise the lid.
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2
Clean the white document lid backing with a soft cloth or sponge
slightly moistened with a mild soap and warm water.
3
Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do not scrub the
backing.
4
Dry the backing with a chamois or soft cloth.
CAUTION
Do not use paper-based wipes as these may scratch the backing.
5
If this does not clean the backing well enough, repeat the
previous steps using isopropyl alcohol, and then wipe the backing
thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove any residual alcohol.
58 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
EN
Cleaning the print path
The HP LaserJet 3300mfp series features a special cleaning mode to
clean the paper path.
Note
This process requires a transparency to remove dust and toner
from the print paper path. Do not use bond or rough paper.
Make sure the transparency used in this cleaning process meets
the media requirements for the printer.
If transparency film is unavailable, you can use paper. If you must
use paper, perform the procedure two or three times to ensure
proper cleaning.
Note
EN
1
Load a transparency in the priority input tray.
2
Make sure that the product is in the Ready state.
3
Press menu/enter then scroll to Service and press menu/enter
4
Scroll to Cleaning Mode and press menu/enter.
5
The transparency feeds through the printer slowly. Discard the
transparency.
The fax/send and cancel lights blink until the cleaning process is
complete.
Cleaning the product 59
1
Cleaning the print
cartridge area
Cleaning the print cartridge area can
improve the quality of your printed
sheets.
2
WARNING!
Before cleaning the product, disconnect
it from the power source and wait for the
product to cool.
1
Open the print cartridge door, and
remove the print cartridge.
3
CAUTION
To prevent damage, do not expose the
print cartridge to light. Cover the print
cartridge if necessary. Also, do not touch
the black sponge transfer roller inside
the printer. Touching it can reduce the
print quality.
4
2
Wipe the media path area and the
print cartridge cavity with a dry, lintfree cloth.
Note
Use only a dry, lint-free cloth to remove
dust and toner. Using a vacuum or other
device to clean inside the product can
damage it.
60 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
3
Replace the print cartridge, and
close the print cartridge door.
4
Plug the power cord back into the
product.
EN
1
Cleaning the printer
pickup roller
If you want to clean the pickup roller
rather than replace it, follow the
instructions below:
2
Remove the pickup roller as described in
steps 1 through 5 of “Replacing the
printer pickup roller” on page 63.
1
3
EN
Dampen a lint-free cloth in isopropyl
alcohol and scrub the roller.
WARNING!
Alcohol is flammable. Keep the alcohol
and cloth away from an open flame.
Before you close the product and plug in
the power cord, allow the alcohol to dry
completely.
2
Using a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe the
pickup roller to remove loosened
dirt.
3
Allow the pickup roller to dry
completely before you reinstall it in
the printer. To reinstall the pickup
roller, see steps 6 through 9 of
"Replacing the printer pickup roller"
on page 64.
Cleaning the product 61
1
Cleaning the printer
separation pad
If you want to clean the separation pad
rather than replace it, follow the
instructions below:
1
Remove the separation pad as
described in steps 1 through 5 of
“Replacing the printer separation
pad” on page 65.
2
Dab a lint-free cloth in isopropyl
alcohol, and scrub the pad.
2
3
4
62 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
WARNING!
Alcohol is flammable. Keep the alcohol
and cloth away from an open flame.
Before you close the product and plug in
the power cord, allow the alcohol to dry
completely.
3
Using a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe the
pad to remove loosened dirt.
4
Allow the pad to dry completely
before you reinstall it in the printer.
To reinstall the pad, see steps 6
through 8 of “Replacing the printer
separation pad” on page 65.
EN
User-replaceable parts
1
Replacing the printer
pickup roller
If the printer regularly misfeeds (no
media feeds through) and cleaning the
pickup roller does not fix it, replace the
pickup roller.
2
3
4
CAUTION
Failure to complete all the steps in this
procedure might damage the product.
1
Unplug the power cord from the
product, and allow the product to
cool.
2
Open the print cartridge door, and
remove the print cartridge.
3
Locate the pickup roller.
4
Release the small, white tabs on
each side of the pickup roller by
pushing them away from the roller,
and then rotate the pickup roller
toward the front.
5
Gently pull the pickup roller up and
out.
5
EN
User-replaceable parts 63
6
6
Position the new pickup roller in the
slot of the previous pickup roller.
Note
Circular and rectangular pegs on each
side prevent you from incorrectly
positioning the pickup roller.
7
8
9
64 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
7
Rotate the top of the new pickup
roller into position until the white
tabs on each side of the roller snap
the roller into place.
8
Reinstall the print cartridge and
close the print cartridge door.
9
Plug the product in to turn it back on.
EN
1
2
Replacing the printer
separation pad
Note
Before you change the separation pad,
clean the pickup roller. See “Cleaning
the printer pickup roller” on page 61 for
instructions.
If the input tray feeds more than one
page at a time, you might have to
replace the printer separation pad.
Recurring feed problems indicate that
the printer separation pad is worn.
3
4
5
EN
1
Unplug the power cord from the
product and allow the product to
cool.
2
Remove the input trays.
3
Locate the blue separation pad.
4
To pry the separation pad up from
the spring-loaded base, insert a flatedged screwdriver in the slot under
the separation pad and twist until the
tabs are free.
5
Reach in through the input tray
opening, push the spring-loaded
base down with one hand, and pull
the separation pad up with the other
hand.
User-replaceable parts 65
6
6
7
Note
The tab on the right is larger to help you
position the separation pad correctly.
7
With one hand, reach through the
input tray opening, and push the
spring-loaded base down. With the
other hand, position the new
separation pad in the slot of the
previous separation pad.
Snap both sides of the separation
pad firmly into place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the separation pad is
straight and that there is no space
between the separation pad and the
spring-loaded base. If the separation
pad is not straight or you see space on
one side, remove the separation pad,
make sure that the larger tab is on the
right, reinsert the separation pad, and
snap both sides into place.
8
66 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
8
Reinstall the input trays, and then
plug the product in to turn it back on.
EN
Installing a new ADF
If the HP LaserJet 3300mfp came without an ADF, an ADF can be
added. An ADF may need to be replaced if it has abnormal media
jams.
1
To install a new or
replacement ADF
1
2
3
4
EN
Remove the flatbed scanner lid by
opening it and gently lifting straight
up.
Note
If you are replacing an existing ADF, you
must first pull up both hinge tabs before
lifting the ADF up out of the product.
2
On the new ADF, unfold the hinges
and pull up the tab on each hinge.
3
Install the new ADF by inserting the
hinges straight down into the
product.
4
Push down both tabs until they click.
Installing a new ADF 67
5
5
Gently close the ADF lid.
WARNING!
To avoid damaging the product, do not
allow the ADF lid to fall onto the flatbed
scanner. Always close the ADF lid when
the product is not in use.
6
68 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
6
Install the ADF input tray by aligning
the two tabs on the input tray with
the two grooves in the ADF lid and
sliding the tray into the grooves until
it snaps into place.
EN
Changing an ADF pick roller assembly
If the ADF has trouble picking paper, the ADF pick roller assembly
may need to be replaced:
1
Unplug the power cord from the
product. If you have a 220V product,
turn off the power switch.
2
Remove the input tray and open the
ADF cover.
3
Press the round green button while
lifting the green lever. Rotate the
green lever until it stops in the open
position. The old pickup roller
assembly should remain on the
black surface.
4
4
Remove the old assembly and put
the new one in exactly the same
place. The largest roller goes in
back, and the gear side will face
away from you.
5
5
Lower the green lever with the flat
green part fitting in between the
rollers. Press down on the green
lever until it snaps in place.
1
2
3
EN
Changing an ADF pick roller assembly 69
6
6
To check for proper installation, lift
the green lever until it remains open.
The new pickup roller assembly
should be secured to the lever
assembly and should not fall out.
7
7
Make sure that both sides of the
assembly are secured by the green
hooks.
8
Lower the green lever assembly and
close the ADF lid. Reinstall the input
tray.
8
If you are experiencing abnormal jams in
the ADF, you may want to order a new
ADF, or upgrade the ADF copy lid. See
"User-replaceable parts".
70 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
EN
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel
1
1
Unplug the power cord from the
product. If you have a 220V product,
turn off the power switch.
2
Remove the existing control panel
bezel by lifting up on both sides of
the bezel edges until all the snaps
are disengaged. Set the old bezel
aside.
2
3
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch any components
or buttons inside the exposed control
panel area.
3
Align the new bezel at the lower
notch. The bezel notch should align
to the inside of the product.
4
Press down until all the snaps are
engaged, and then press outward
until the bezel is secured.
5
Plug the product in to turn it back on.
If you have a 220V product, turn on
the power switch.
4
EN
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel 71
72 Chapter 3 - Maintenance
EN
4
Operational overview
Chapter contents
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Formatter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Central processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Line Interface Unit (LIU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Scanner formatter PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Flash memory or ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Standard Boot Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Parallel interface or Universal Serial Bus interface . . . . . . 78
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Draft mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
MEt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Enhanced I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
PJL overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Scanner and ADF functions and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Scanner Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Scanner Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ADF Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ADF paper path and ADF sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ADF Jam Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Printer functions and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Engine control unit/power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Image formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Printer paper-feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Basic sequence of operation (formatter-to-printer) . . . . . . 98
LIU (fax) functions and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
PSTN operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The fax subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Formatter in the fax subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LIU in the fax subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fax page storage in flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
EN
Chapter contents 73
Basic functions
This chapter presents a functional overview of the HP LaserJet
3300mfp series. The following systems are discussed:
formatter functions
scanner and ADF functions and operation
printer functions and operation
• ECU (engine controller unit) system/power system
• image formation system
• paper-feed system (printer) and document-feed system
(document scanner)
LIU (fax) functions and operation
The full product consists of:
the scanner (flatbed/ADF)
the printer
the line interface unit (LIU).
Each of these three systems brings its own characteristic functionality
to the product: scanning, printing, and telecommunications
respectively. In addition, these systems combine forces to complete
the functionality offering of the product.
The scanner and printer work together to make copies.
The scanner and LIU work together to send faxes.
The LIU and printer work together to receive faxes.
Operation sequences of the printer are controlled by the ECU.
Operation sequences of the LIU and document scanner are
controlled by the formatter.
74 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
HP 3300 Product
ADF
Scanner Formatter
Printer
Fax
LIU
Formatter
Computer
Scanner
Printer Engine
ECU
Figure 10.
EN
Product configuration
Basic functions 75
Formatter system
The formatter coordinates the major systems. It is responsible for the
following:
controlling the scanner formatter
formatting and controlling copies
receiving and processing print data from the printer interface
monitoring the control panel and relaying printer status
information
developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the
print engine
communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional
interface
communicating document data to and from the LIU
The formatter receives print data from the bidirectional Extended
Capabilities Port (ECP) mode interface or Universal Serial Bus (USB)
interface and converts it into a dot image. The ECU synchronizes the
image formation system with the paper-feed system and signals the
formatter to send the print image data. The formatter sends the print
image data (dots) in the form of a video signal, and the printing
process begins.
Central processing unit
The formatter incorporates an embedded Coldfire V3 microprocessor
operating at 90 MHz.
Line Interface Unit (LIU)
The LIU provides the required safety isolation, signal coupling, and
impedance matching between the telephone line and the modem
chipset.
Scanner formatter PCA
The scanner formatter manages the functions of the control panel,
and controls audio, scanning, and the ADF. It relays scanning data,
control panel data, and other control data to the main formatter PCA.
76 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Flash memory or ROM
The formatter system includes firmware code that controls the
product stored in either flash memory or ROM, depending on when
the product was manufactured. Initially the formatters in all
manufactured units are built with flash memory. As the product
manufacturing matures, the code is stored in standard read-onlymemory (ROM).
Units with firmware code in flash memory allow the firmware code to
be recovered or updated. The firmware update/recovery process is
described in Chapter 6. Units with firmware code in ROM will not
require firmware code recovery or updating.
Standard Boot Process
When the product is unplugged or the power is off, the firmware code
is stored on the formatter in two blocks. The first block of code is an
executable boot block (about 64K of code). The second block of code
is a compressed version of the product control code.
When the product is powered up, the boot block decompresses the
product control code and stores it in RAM. Then the product performs
a full startup with the control code running from RAM.
Product startup messages
The LED display contains different messages depending upon the
progress of the boot process:
Table 13. Product startup messages
Message
Cause
Solution
(Blank display for many
seconds after power
on). Boot block failure.
The flash memory
requires a DIMM
recovery of the
firmware code (see
Chapter 6).
Contact Service
Control code failure.
The flash memory
requires a DIMM
recovery of the
firmware code (see
Chapter 6).
Hewlett Packard
Moving cursor HP
display. The product is
starting up.
Wait until Ready
display.
Product startup is
complete and the
product is ready for
action.
Begin using product.
<<<
Ready.........
EN
Formatter system 77
RAM
One bank of Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM) stores parameters.
Dynamic random access memory (DRAM) provides temporary
storage of the product program code plus copy, scan, and print
data.
Parallel interface or Universal Serial Bus
interface
The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional ECP or
USB interface. These interfaces provide high-speed, two-way
communication between the product and the host, allowing you to
change product settings and monitor product status from the host
computer.
Control panel
The control panel configuration varies by model in the HP LaserJet
3300mfp series. For example, only the HP LaserJet 3330mfp has the
fax buttons.
The HP LaserJet 3300mfp series control panel consists of:
up to six groups of buttons to control fax, copy, scan, and
configuration functionality (with all six on the HP LaserJet 3330).
a 2 x 16 LCD display for display of status, menus, and messages.
up to two front panel status lights (one by the cancel button and
one by the fax/send button on the HP LaserJet 3330).
Draft mode
Depending on which driver is used, selecting draft or EconoMode
from the driver allows the product to use approximately fifty percent
less toner, extending the life of the print cartridge.
MEt
HP MEt effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of
font and data-compression methods.
78 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Enhanced I/O
The Enhanced I/O feature allows product memory to be used for
storing data received from the host computer. When Enhanced I/O is
enabled, you can send more data to the product in shorter amounts of
time, which allows you to return to your application sooner. Enhanced
I/O has the following options:
Auto—allows the product to use Enhanced I/O memory
allocation to increase the speed of data transfer from the host
computer to the product, if necessary. The default setting is Auto.
Off—uses the minimum amount of product memory for storing
data sent from the host computer.
Page Protect—allows the formatter to create the entire page
image in page buffer memory before physically moving the media
through the printer. This process ensures that the entire page will
be printed.
Page complexity (ruling lines, complex graphics, or dense text)
can exceed the printer’s ability to create the page image fast
enough to keep pace with the image formation process. If Page
Protect is disabled and a page is too complex, the page might
print in parts (for example, the top half on one page and the
bottom half on the next page). Some print-data loss is likely in
these instances, and the product will display an error message.
PJL overview
Printer Job Language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in
addition to the standard Printer Command Language (PCL). With
standard ECP cabling, PJL allows the product to perform functions
such as:
EN
Two-way communication with the host computer through a
bidirectional parallel or USB connection. The product can
communicate information to the host (such as the control panel
status).
Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the
next. For example, if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape
mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they
are formatted for landscape printing.
Formatter system 79
Scanner and ADF functions and operation
Scanner Functions
The scanner uses a light source, a color-separation method, and a
Charge Coupled Device array (CCD) to collect optical information
about the document and transform that into an image file. The
scanner consists of:
a lamp (cold fluorescent bulb)
five mirrors and a lens
a CCD
Scanner Glass
CCFL Lamp
600 ppi CCD
Lens
Figure 11.
Optical diagram of scanner
The scanner lamp illuminates a small strip of the document (called
the raster line). The light is directed via the mirrors through the lens to
the CCD. The CCD senses and records the light, creating an analog
representation of the raster line. If using the ADF, the document then
advances in the ADF to the next raster line. If using the flatbed, the
scanner module advances to the next raster line. This advancing and
collection process continues up to the end of the sheet.
80 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
The image data is collected in the scanner formatter where it is
processed and sent to the formatter. The formatter then handles the
image data, outputting it as a copy, sending it through the LIU as a
fax, or directing it to the computer as scanner output.
The image data collected is 600 pixels per inch. Each pixel has 8 bits
for each of the three colors (256 “grey” levels for each color) or a total
of 24 bits per pixel (24-bit color).
Scanner Operation
Upon power-up and periodically at other times, the scanner assembly
moves systematically to locate its home position. It then calibrates
itself to a white label located under the glass at the right end of the
scan tub.
If a document is detected in the ADF when a copy or scan is initiated
(from software or control panel), the scan module moves to the left
side of the scan tub and stops. The image is acquired as the paper is
fed through the ADF past the scanner module.
If no document is detected in the ADF, or if the model does not have
an ADF, the scan module acquires the image from the flatbed glass
while slowly moving within the scan tub.
ADF Operation
Standby (paper loading) mode: In standby mode, the pickup roller
is up and the stack stop is down, preventing the user from inserting
the document original in too far. When a document is inserted
properly, it is detected by the paper-present sensor.
The standard operation of the ADF consists of the pick, feed, and lift
steps.
Pick: Upon receipt of a copy or scan command, the ADF motor
engages the gear train to lower the pick roller assembly and raise the
stack-stop. The first roller is called the pre-pick roller and serves to
move the top few sheets forward into the ADF. The next roller is the
pick roller. This roller contacts the ADF separation pad which
separates multiple pages into single sheets.
Feed: The single sheet continues through the path. Along the way, it
is detected by the form sensor a set distance from the ADF glass.
This alerts the scanner to start when the page reaches the glass. The
scanner acquires the image, one raster line at a time, until the end of
the page is detected and the page is ejected. The pick and feed steps
are repeated as long as paper is detected in the ADF input tray.
EN
Scanner and ADF functions and operation 81
Lift: When no more paper is detected in the ADF input tray and the
trailing edge of the last page is detected by the form sensor, the last
sheet is ejected and the motor turns in a sequence which lifts the pick
roller assembly to standby or “paper loading” mode again.
The ADF will not function with the ADF door open. The paper path is
incomplete if the ADF lid is lifted from the glass.
ADF paper path and ADF sensors
The following figure shows the ADF paper path.
Paper present sensor
Pick roller
Stack stop
Pre-pick roller
Picks top sheet
ADF door
open sensor
INP
UT T
RAY
Separation pad
Cleanout
PAGE EJECTS FULLY
Form sensor
OUTPUT AREA
Postscan
rollers
Prescan rollers
ADF glass
Figure 12.
Document scanner path
The paper present sensor determines if paper is in the ADF. The form
sensor detects the top and bottom edges of the document. One other
sensor detects an open ADF door.
82 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
ADF Jam Detection
The ADF has two sensors that detect paper. The paper present
sensor detects the presence of media in the ADF input tray. The form
sensor detects media moving through the ADF. If a jam is detected,
the ADF immediately stops the paper feeding and the control panel
displays a jam message.
A jam can be detected under any of the following conditions:
EN
Document feeder jam—When documents are detected as
present in the ADF input tray, and a command to copy, scan or
fax is received, the scan module travels to the left side of the
scan assembly and stops beneath the ADF scanner glass. The
ADF then attempts three times, or for about ten seconds, to
advance the paper to the form sensor. If the paper does not
advance, the scan module travels back to the home position on
the right side of the scanner assembly. The control panel displays
the message Doc. Feed Mispick. Reload.
Long document jam—If the paper has advanced to trigger the
form sensor, but the trailing edge is not detected within the time
allowed for a 15 in document (the maximum allowable page
length for the ADF), the scanner returns to the home position at
the right side of the scanner assembly. The control panel displays
the message Doc. Feed Jam.
Stall jam—When a page that is less than 15 in long has
advanced to the form sensor but has not left it within the expected
time, the paper has probably stalled or jammed. The scanner
returns to the home position at the right side of the scanner
assembly. The control panel displays the message Doc. Feed
Jam.
Other—If the paper stops in the ADF and the scan module
remains under the ADF scanner glass, an internal firmware error
has probably occurred. This is usually remedied by cycling the
power.
Scanner and ADF functions and operation 83
Printer functions and operation
Printer functions are divided into five groups:
engine control
formatter
image formation
laser/scanner
pickup and feed
The following figure is a block diagram of the printer and its
relationship to the ADF/scanner and LIU:
ADF
Scanner System
LIU
Computer
Formatter System
Figure 13.
Printer unit functional block diagram
84 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Engine control unit/power system
The engine control unit (ECU) coordinates all print engine activities,
drives the laser, and coordinates print data from the formatter with the
image formation process. The ECU also includes power supply and
distribution circuitry.
Note
In several other HP LaserJet products, the ECU is also known as
the controller PCA or the DC controller PCA.
The ECU controls the following systems and functions:
Printer engine control
• paper motion monitoring and control (printing)
• motor
Printer laser/scanner
Power system
• AC power distribution
• DC power distribution
• overcurrent/overvoltage protection
• high-voltage power distribution
EN
Printer functions and operation 85
The following figure shows the various ECU loads:
Figure 14.
ECU loads
86 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Printer engine control system
Paper motion monitoring and control
The ECU controls paper motion in the printer by continuously
monitoring the various paper sensors and coordinating the timing with
the other print processes.
For a detailed explanation of paper movement and the interaction of
the photo sensors and solenoid with the paper movement process,
see “Printer paper-feed system” on page 94.
Motor
The motor is controlled by the ECU. The motor provides all of the
printer paper movement.
Printer laser/scanner drive
The ECU sends signals to the laser/scanner assembly to modulate
the laser diode “on” and “off” and to drive the laser/scanner motor.
Figure 15.
EN
Overview of laser/scanner operation
Printer functions and operation 87
Power system on ECU
The AC, DC, and high-voltage power supply circuits are all contained
within the ECU.
AC power distribution
The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord
is connected to the AC power source. AC voltage is distributed to the
DC power supply circuitry and to the AC driver circuitry, which
controls AC voltage to the fuser assembly heating element.
DC power distribution
The DC power distribution circuitry, located on the ECU, distributes
+3.3 Vdc, +5 Vdc, +24 Vdc, and +32 Vdc as follows:
+3.3 Vdc:
Formatter
Laser/beam detect circuitry ECU
Photo sensors
ADF sensors
Control Panel
+5 Vdc:
Formatter
ECU
Laser/beam detect circuitry
+24 Vdc:
Printer paper path motor
Exhaust fan
Laser/scanner motor
Solenoid
Formatter (routing only)
High-voltage power supply
Fuser safety circuit
CCD
+32 Vdc:
ADF motor
Scanner motor
Formatter (routing only)
88 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Overcurrent/overvoltage
There are two overvoltage devices in this product:
Fuse F101 provides overcurrent protection for the fusing system
circuitry.
Fuse F102 provides overcurrent protection to the printer DC
power supply circuitry.
You can check or replace the fuses by removing the back cover
(page 164).
In addition, the +24 Vdc and +3.3 Vdc power circuitry contains an
overcurrent protection circuit that automatically shuts off the output
voltage when an overcurrent condition occurs as a result of a short or
an abnormal voltage on the load side. These circuits automatically
reset.
High-voltage power distribution
The high-voltage power supply applies an overlap of DC and AC
voltage to the primary charging roller and the developing roller. This
circuit also applies a positive or negative DC voltage to the transfer
roller according to the instructions from the engine control unit.
This circuit also controls the image density by changing the primary
AC voltage and the developing AC bias according to the print density
setting.
EN
Printer functions and operation 89
High voltage is disabled when the print cartridge door is open. When
the left-side door is opened, the print cartridge door also opens,
disabling high voltage.
Figure 16.
High-voltage power supply circuit
90 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Image formation system
Laser printing requires the interaction of several different
technologies including electronics, optics, and electrophotographics
to provide a printed page. Each process functions independently and
must be coordinated with the other printer processes. Image
formation consists of seven processes:
Writing stage
Conditioning stage
Figure 17.
Image formation block diagram
Print cartridge
As the focal point of the image formation system, the print cartridge
contains toner and houses the cleaning, conditioning, and developing
stages of the process. The print cartridge contains the photosensitive
drum, primary charging roller, developing station, toner cavity, and
cleaning station. By including these components (which wear,
degrade, or are consumed) in the replaceable print cartridge, the
need for many service calls is eliminated. The special photosensitive
properties of the drum form an image on the drum surface and then
transfer the image to media.
CAUTION
EN
The print cartridge does not include a light-blocking shutter. Do not
expose the drum to light, which can permanently damage the drum.
Protect the print cartridge whenever you remove it.
Printer functions and operation 91
The seven image-formation processes
1
Conditioning stage (primary charging)—This process applies
a uniform negative charge to the surface of the drum with the
primary charging roller, which is located in the print cartridge. The
primary charging roller is coated with conductive rubber. An AC
bias is applied to the roller to erase any residual charges from
any previous image. In addition, the primary charging roller
applies a negative DC bias to create a uniform negative potential
on the drum surface. The print density setting modifies the DC
voltage.
2
Writing stage (scanning exposure)—During this process, a
modulated laser diode projects the beam onto a rotating scanning
mirror. As the mirror rotates, the beam reflects off the mirror, first
through a set of focusing lenses, then off a mirror, and finally
through a slot in the top of the print cartridge, and onto the
photosensitive drum. The beam sweeps the drum from left to
right, discharging the negative potential wherever the beam
strikes the surface. This creates a latent electrostatic image,
which later is developed into a visible image.
Because the beam sweeps the entire length of the drum while the
drum rotates, the entire surface area of the drum can be covered.
At the end of each sweep, the beam strikes the beam-detect lens,
generating the beam-detect signal (BD signal). The BD signal is
sent to the ECU where it is converted to an electrical signal used
to synchronize the output of the next scan line of data.
3
Developing stage—During this process, the latent electrostatic
image is present on the drum. The toner particles obtain a
negative surface charge by rubbing against the developing
cylinder, which is connected to a negative DC supply. The
negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged (exposed,
grounded) areas of the drum, and it is repelled from the
negatively charged (unexposed) areas.
4
Transfer stage—During this process, the toner image on the
drum surface is transferred to the media. The transfer roller
applies a positive charge to the back of the media, which attracts
the negatively charged toner on the drum surface to the media.
After separation, the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next
image.
92 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
EN
5
Separation stage—During this process, the media separates
from the drum. To stabilize the feed system and prevent toner
dropouts on the printed image at low temperature and humidity,
the static eliminator reduces the charge on the back of the media.
6
Fusing stage—During this process, the heat and pressure fuse
the toner into the media to produce a permanent image. The
media passes between a heated fusing element and a soft
pressure roller, which melt the toner and press it into the media.
7
Drum-cleaning stage—During this process, the cleaning blade
is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times. As the drum
rotates during printing, the cleaning blade wipes excess toner off
the drum and stores it in the waste toner receptacle.
Printer functions and operation 93
Printer paper-feed system
The main input tray and the priority input tray merge into one main
input area. Media placed in any of these areas activates the paperout sensor (PS201), which informs the ECU that media is present.
The following steps occur when the product receives a print job:
Step 1 The ECU activates the laser/scanner assembly and the
motor. Paper motion begins when the ECU energizes the
solenoid (SL001).
Step 2 The paper pickup roller rotates once. The paper lift plate
pushes the media against the pickup roller.
Step 3 The pickup roller grabs the top sheet and advances it to the
feed assembly drive rollers. To ensure that only one sheet is
fed, a main separation pad and two subpads hold the
remainder of the stack in place.
Step 4 The feed assembly drive rollers advance the media to the
top-of-page sensor (PS402). This sensor informs the ECU of
the exact location of the leading edge of media, so that the
image being written on the photosensitive drum can be
precisely positioned on the page.
Step 5 The feed assembly drive rollers then advance the media to
the transfer area where the toner image on the
photosensitive drum is transferred to the media.
Step 6 After the image is transferred, the media enters the fuser
assembly where heat from the fuser and pressure from the
pressure roller permanently bond the toner image to media.
The paper delivery sensor (PS401) determines that the
media has successfully moved out of the fusing area.
Step 7 The fuser assembly exit rollers deliver media to either the
paper output bin or the straight-through output path,
depending upon the position of the straight-through output
path door.
94 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Straight-through
output door
Figure 18.
EN
Printer paper path
Printer functions and operation 95
Jam detection
The paper-out sensor (PS201) detects the presence of media in
either the priority input tray or the main input tray. The top-of-page
sensor (PS402) and the paper delivery sensor (PS401) detect media
moving through the printer. If a jam is detected, the ECU immediately
stops the printing process and displays a jam message on the control
panel.
A jam can be detected under any of the following conditions:
Pickup delay jam—Media does not reach the top-of-page
sensor (PS402) after the pickup solenoid (SL001) has been
turned on twice (the original pickup plus a retry) within 2.8
seconds.
Pickup stationary jam—The top-of-page sensor (PS402) does
not detect the trailing edge of media within 4.6 seconds of
detecting the leading edge.
Delivery-delay jam—The paper delivery sensor (PS401) does
not detect the leading edge of media within 2.1 seconds after the
top-of-page sensor (PS402) detects the leading edge.
Wrapping jam—The paper delivery sensor (PS401) does not
detect the trailing edge of the media within 1.5 seconds after the
top-of-page sensor (PS402) detects the leading edge and within
ten seconds after the paper delivery sensor (PS401) detects the
leading edge.
Delivery-stationary jam—The paper delivery sensor (PS401)
does not detect the leading edge of media within 2.2 seconds
after the top-of-page sensor (PS402) detects the trailing edge.
Residual paper jam—The top-of-page sensor (PS402) or the
paper delivery sensor (PS401) detect media in the initial rotation
period.
96 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Solenoid, photosensors, and switches
The following figure shows the locations of the solenoid,
photosensors, and switches.
1
6
2
3
4
7
5
Figure 19.
Solenoid, photosensors, and switches
1
Paper delivery sensor (PS401) senses when paper has
successfully moved out of the fusing area.
2
Power switch.
Note
EN
Products sold in North America and all of the 100-110V units do
not have power switches.
3
Top-of-page sensor (PS402) detects the leading and trailing
edges of the paper. It synchronizes the photosensitive drum and
the top of the paper.
4
Engine test switch (SW201), see “Engine test” on page 200 for an
explanation of the switch.
5
Door-open switch (SW301) detects whether or not the print
cartridge door is closed and the print cartridge is installed
properly. Printing cannot continue until the print cartridge door is
closed and the print cartridge is in its correct position.
6
Solenoid (SL001) activates the pickup roller.
7
Paper-out sensor (PS201) senses when paper is in the main
input tray or the priority input tray.
Printer functions and operation 97
Basic sequence of operation (formatter-toprinter)
The operation sequence of the printer is controlled by the
microprocessor (CPU) on the ECU. The following events take place
during normal printer operation:
Table 14. Basic sequence of operation
Period
Purpose
Remarks
WAIT
After the product is turned on
until the end of the initial
rotation of the main motor.
To clear the drum surface of
potential and to clean the
primary charging roller.
Detects whether or not the
cartridge is installed.
STBY (Standby)
From the end of the WAIT
period or the LSTR period
until the pickup command is
sent from the formatter. Or,
from the end of the LSTR
period until the product is
turned off.
To pause until the product is
ready to print.
INTR (Initial Rotation Period)
After the pickup command
has been sent from the
formatter until the media
reaches the top-of-page
sensor (PS402).
To stabilize the
photosensitive drum
sensitivity in preparation for
printing. Also to clean the
primary charging roller.
PRINT (Print)
From the end of the initial
rotation until the primary
voltage goes OFF.
To form images on the
photosensitive drum based
on the VIDEO signals (/VDO,
VDO) sent from the formatter
and to transfer the toner
image onto the media.
LSTR (Last Rotation Period)
After the primary voltage
goes OFF until the main
motor stops rotating.
To deliver the last page. Also
to clean the primary charging
roller.
98 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
When the pickup command is
sent from the video controller,
the printer enters the INTR
period immediately after the
end of the LSTR period.
EN
Figure 20.
EN
Printer timing diagram
Printer functions and operation 99
LIU (fax) functions and operation
PSTN operation
The public switched telephone network (PSTN) operates by having a
central office (CO) that generates a constant voltage on the TIP and
RING wires (48 V usually). When a device goes on-hook it does so by
connecting impedance (such as 600 ohms for the US) across TIP and
RING allowing a line current to flow. The CO can detect this current
and it can send things like dial tones. The product generates more
signaling tones such as dialing digits to tell the CO how to connect the
call. The product also is able to detect tones like a busy tone from the
CO to tell it how to behave.
When the call is finally connected, the CO behaves as if it were a
piece of wire connecting the sender and receiver. This is the period
during which all of the fax signaling and data transfer occurs. When a
call completes, the circuit goes open again and line current ceases to
flow, removing the CO connection from both sender and receiver.
All of this is done with a two-wire arrangement. The two wires are
called TIP and RING on all phone systems and on most phone
systems they appear on pins 3 and 4 of the RJ-11 modular jack (the
one on the LIU for HP LaserJet 3330mfp. These two wires do not
have to be polarized, as it is expected that all equipment works with
either TIP or RING on pin 3 and the other one on pin 4. This allows
the use of cables of either polarity to be interconnected and still work.
These are the basic functions of PSTN operation that are assumed in
the design of the fax subsystem for HP LaserJet 3330mfp. The
product generates and detects the signaling tones, currents, and data
signals required to transmit and receive faxes on the PSTN.
The fax subsystem
On the HP LaserJet 3330mfp, the formatter, LIU, firmware, and
software all contribute to the fax functionality. The designs of the
formatter and LIU along with parameters in the firmware determine
the majority of the regulatory requirements for telephony on the
product.
The HP LaserJet 3330mfp fax subsystem is designed to support V.34
fax transmission as well as lower speeds such as V.17 fax and older
fax machines.
100 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
Formatter in the fax subsystem
The formatter contains the modem chipset (DSP and CODEC) that
controls the basic fax functions of tone generation and detection,
along with channel control for the fax transmissions.
The CODEC and its associated circuitry act to control transmit and
receive gains, and compensate for transmission signal coupling into
the receive channel. Also on the formatter is circuitry to add
termination impedance to help match the telephone network
impedance.
LIU in the fax subsystem
Two versions of LIU are used in the HP LaserJet 3330mfp. One is
used in the Americas and for Asia. The other is used primarily in
Europe.
Differences in the European version include:
a different voltage protection device
current limiting of the DC current
filtering for the countries/regions that use billing or metering tones
control of the impedance of the DC circuit via SHUNT signal
Due to the lack of polarization on TIP and RING, all LIU circuitry that
connects to TIP and RING is bi-directional. The LIU operates
identically when TIP and RING are reversed.
The rest of this section describes the hardware functions of the LIU.
Safety isolation
The most important function of the LIU safety isolation between the
high-voltage, transient prone environment of the telephone network
(TNV - telephone network voltage) and the low-voltage analog and
digital circuitry of the formatter (SELV - secondary extra low voltage).
This safety isolation provides both customer safety and product
reliability in the telecom environment.
Any signals that cross the isolation barrier do so either optically or
magnetically. The breakdown voltage rating of barrier-critical
components is greater than 1.5kV.
EN
LIU (fax) functions and operation 101
Safety-protection circuitry
In addition to the safety barrier, protection against RING and overcurrent events is an LIU function.
Telephone over-voltages can be either differential mode or common
mode. The RING can be transient in nature (a lightning induced surge
or ESD) or continuous (a crossed power line with a phone line). LIU
protection circuitry provides margin against combinations of RING
events.
Common mode protection is provided by the selection of high voltage
barrier critical components (transformer, relay, and optoisolators).
The safety barrier of the LIU PCB traces and the clearance between
the LIU and surrounding components also contribute to common
mode protection.
A voltage suppressor (a crowbar type SIDACTOR) provides
differential protection. This device becomes low impedance at
approximately 300V differential, and crowbars to a low voltage. A
series thermal switch works in conjunction with the crowbar for
continuous RING events, such as crossed power lines.
When the differential RING is continuous, the resulting over-current
causes the thermal switch to become high impedance, disconnecting
RING from the network and protecting the crowbar from thermal
overload. The thermal switch automatically resets to low impedance
after the over-current condition is removed reconnecting RING to the
network.
Data path
The magnetically coupled signals that cross the isolation barrier go
either through a transformer or a relay. The TIP and RING signals
use a transformer as a means to cross the isolation barrier.
TIP and RING are the two-wire paths for all signals from the
telephone network. All signaling and data information comes across
them, including fax tones and fax data.
The telephone network uses DC current to determine hook state of
the telephone, so it is necessary to have line current present during a
call. On some line interfaces this current flows through the
transformer, but on the HP LaserJet 3330mfp LIU, it is blocked by a
capacitor from going into the transformer.
Blocking the current with a capacitor prevents the core of the
transformer from being saturated by the high DC voltage, which can
affect the AC signal quality. Rather than through the transformer, this
102 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
LIU is designed so the current flows through another circuit called a
gyrator or DC hold circuit. This creates the path for the central office
current to flow when a call is in progress.
Hook state
Another magnetically coupled signal is the control signal for
disconnection of the downstream telephone devices (such as a
phone or answering machine). A control signal originating on the
formatter can change the relay state causing the auxiliary jack
(downstream jack) to be disconnected from the circuit.
The HP LaserJet 3330mfp is able to take over a call it recognizes as
a fax. If it doesn’t directly answer the line, it still listens to incoming
calls for the fax tone or for direction from the user to receive a fax.
This idle mode is also called eavesdropping. This mode is active
when the product is on-hook but there is current in the downstream
phone line due to another device being off-hook. During
eavesdropping, the receive circuit is enabled but has a different gain
than during normal fax transmissions.
The HP LaserJet 3330mfp product does not take control of the line
unless it detects a fax tone or unless the operator tells it to manually
connect. This is good because it allows the user to make voice calls
from a phone connected to the HP LaserJet 3330mfp without being
cut off during voice calls.
Downstream current detection
A signal that is optically coupled is the aux phone detect signal. This
signal tells the firmware that there is an active phone (or modem or
answering machine) connected to the auxiliary port of the product
(the right side of the RJ-11 jack).
A circuit that can detect current above a certain threshold generates
the downstream current detection signal. The downstream current
goes through a resistor, generating a voltage. If this voltage is above
the level of the voltage that would be generated by a current at the
threshold level, the signal changes state.
The downstream current detection signal is coupled back to the
formatter through an optoisolator across the safety isolation barrier.
This signal is used by firmware to ensure the product does not go offhook (and disconnect a downstream call) until it has been authorized
to do so (by a manual fax start or detection of the appropriate tones).
EN
LIU (fax) functions and operation 103
Hook switch control
Another signal coupled optically is the hook switch control. This is a
signal from the formatter that causes an optoisolator on the LIU to go
active (making an open circuit into a short circuit). When shorted, the
circuit is drawing DC current from the central office and is considered
“on-hook.” When open, there is no DC current and the state is
considered to be “off-hook.”
For pulse dialing, the optoisolator is toggled on and off with a
particular timing sequence to generate pulses recognized as dialing
digits by the central office of the telephone company.
Ring detect
Another optically coupled signal on the LIU is ring detect. Ring detect
is a combination of voltage levels and cadence (time on and time off).
They both must be present to have a valid ring detected by the
product.
The LIU works with the firmware to determine if an incoming signal is
an answerable ring. Circuits on the LIU detect a ring voltage above a
certain threshold and a corresponding signal is passed to the
formatter indicating the ring is above the threshold. The firmware then
measures the time the signal is high and low and qualifies the
cadence to decide if it is a valid ring.
Line current control
The DC current from the CO needs to have a path to flow from TIP to
RING. Since it does not flow in the transformer, a path through some
transistors and diodes (the DC hold circuit) acts like a simulated
inductor (thus replacing the function of the transformer). This DC hold
circuit is the main component of the voltage-current characteristic
seen between TIP and RING.
Two other functions of this block of circuits are the current limit and
the SHUNT for Europe. Current limit basically maintains a constant
current from TIP to RING once the voltage reaches around 50mA.
The voltage can vary and the current will remain the same.
The shunt function changes the impedance (the current-voltage
characteristic) during certain special events such as pulse dialing and
going on-hook.
During such an event, the firmware tells the DSP on the formatter to
activate SHUNT. A signal goes to the LIU through an optoisolator
(optically coupled) which changes the state of some transistors so
104 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
that the board has a linear current characteristic (normally it’s current
limited). This allows more current to flow to the network as required
by these special events.
Billing (metering) tone filters
Switzerland and Germany provide high frequency AC signals on the
phone line for the purpose of billing customers. LC filters are provided
on the European LIU's to prevent these billing signals from adversely
affecting the data path and the DC hold circuit.
An additional filter in the cable (for certain countries/regions) may in
some cases supplement these LC filters. These billings signals are
not used in the US, so these filters are not present on the US LIU.
Fax page storage in flash memory
Fax pages are the electronic images of the document page that have
been scanned to be sent to another fax machine, have been
generated to be sent by the computer, or have been received from a
fax machine to be printed.
The HP LaserJet 3330mfp stores all fax pages in flash memory
automatically. Once these pages are written into flash memory they
are stored until either the pages are sent to another fax machine,
printed on the device, transmitted to the PC, or erased by the user.
These pages are stored in flash memory, which is the non-volatile
memory that can be read from, written to, and erased repeatedly. The
HP LaserJet 3330mfp has 4 MB of flash memory of which 3.4 MB is
available for fax storage. The remaining 0.6 MB is used for the file
system and reclamation. Adding RAM does not affect the fax page
storage since the HP LaserJet 3330mfp does not use RAM for storing
fax pages.
Accessibility of stored pages
Stored fax pages can be accessed by the user for reprinting or resending in case of errors. Other fax devices store fax pages in either
normal RAM or short-term RAM. The LaserJet 3100 and 3150 use
short-term RAM while the OfficeJet products use normal RAM.
Normal RAM immediately loses its data when power is lost while
short-term RAM loses its data about 60 minutes after power failure.
Flash memory maintains its data for years without any applied power.
EN
LIU (fax) functions and operation 105
Advantages of flash memory storage
Fax pages stored in flash memory are persistent. They will not be lost
due to power failure no matter how long the power is off. Users can
reprint faxes in case the print cartridge runs out of toner or the
product has other errors while printing faxes.
The HP LaserJet 3330mfp also has scan-ahead functionality that
makes use of flash memory. Scan-ahead automatically scans pages
into flash memory before a fax job is sent. This allows the sender to
pick up their original document right after it is scanned, eliminating the
need to wait until the fax is transmission is complete.
Because fax pages in the HP LaserJet 3330mfp are stored in flash
memory, not RAM, more RAM is available in the HP LaserJet
3330mfp to handle larger and more complicated copy and print jobs.
106 Chapter 4 - Operational overview
EN
5
Removal and
replacement
Chapter contents
Removal and replacement strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before performing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts removal order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Separation of scanner from printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner side covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat lid or ADF assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The ADF pick roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF document feed guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF separation pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF scanner glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Interface Unit (LIU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
109
109
110
110
111
113
113
115
119
119
120
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
129
130
132
133
137
139
140
141
143
147
149
150
152
Chapter contents 107
Pickup assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Paper lift-plate assembly and pickup roller shaft . . . . . . .156
Right plate assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Left plate assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Bottom assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Left bottom frame support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
ECU fuses and ECU pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Paper-feed assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
108 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Removal and replacement strategy
This chapter documents the removal and replacement of fieldreplaceable units (FRUs) only.
Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, notes
are included to provide directions for difficult or critical replacement
procedures.
WARNING!
Remove the power cord before attempting to service the product.
If this warning is not followed, severe injury can result as well as
damage to the device. Certain functional checks during
troubleshooting must be performed with power supplied to the
product. However, the power supply should be disconnected
during removal of any parts.
Never operate or service the product with the protective cover
removed from the laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam,
although invisible, can damage your eyes.
The sheet metal edges of the product can be sharp. Use caution
when working on the product.
CAUTION
Some parts are electrostatic discharge (ESD)-sensitive. Always
perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation.
To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align
it with the existing thread pattern, then carefully turn it clockwise to
tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes
stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly.
Always remove the print cartridge before removing or replacing
parts. See “Print cartridge” on page 110.
Required tools
CAUTION
EN
#2 Phillips-head screwdriver with magnetic tip
Small flatblade screwdriver
Needle-nose pliers
ESD mat
Penlight
#8 torx screwdriver
Do not use a PoziDriv screwdriver or any motorized screwdriver.
These can damage screws or screw threads on the product.
Removal and replacement strategy 109
Before performing service
Remove all media.
Unplug the power cable.
Place the product on an ESD mat.
Remove the main input tray.
Remove the print cartridge (see page 110).
Note
For service purposes, the upper part of the HP LaserJet 3300mfp
series is in effect “the scanner” and the lower part is “the printer.”
Together they also act as a photocopier or fax machine, but the
service description here is simplified by referring to copier or fax
functionality only if specifically necessary.
Print cartridge
Note
CAUTION
Figure 21.
You will feel resistance when you open the print cartridge door.
1
Open the print cartridge door, which lifts the print cartridge toward
you.
2
Remove the print cartridge.
To prevent damage, do not expose the print cartridge to light. Cover
it with a piece of paper.
Removing the print cartridge
110 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Parts removal order
Use the following three diagrams to determine which parts must be
removed before removing other parts.
1
Locate the part you want to remove on one of the diagrams.
2
If the part is on the first diagram, separation of the printer from the
scanner is not required.
3
If the part is on the third diagram, it is required or strongly
advisable to separate the scanner from the printer before
removing the part.
Scanner/printer separation not required:
LIU (HP3330 only)
Formatter and RFI shield
Left bottom frame support
Right side cover
Right scanner cover
Back cover assembly
Motor
ECU
Paper feed assembly
Left side door
Print cartridge door
Front cover
Front guide assembly
Pickup assembly
Pickup roller shaft
Paper lift-plate assembly
Left scanner cover
Scanner formatter
Flat copy lid or ADF
ADF paper pick roller assembly
ADF separation pad
ADF document feed guide
ADF window frame
ADF scanner glass
Control panel bezel
Control panel
Printer pickup roller
Printer separation pad
Transfer roller
EN
Removal and replacement strategy 111
Parts removal to separate scanner from printer:
Right cover
Right scanner cover
Left scanner cover
Scanner/printer separation required:
Scanner Assembly
(Control panel bezel)
(Control panel)
Control panel chassis
Speaker
Control panel cable
Printer top cover
Solenoid
Fan assembly
Laser/scanner
Left fuser support plate
Right fuser support plate
Fuser assembly
Output rollers
Right support cover
(Print cartridge cover, front cover, front guide assembly)
Right plate assembly
Left support cover
(Rear cover, formatter, left bottom frame support, print cartridge
cover, front cover, front guide assembly)
Left plate assembly
Note
The scanner assembly may be contaminated if it is opened outside
of a cleanroom environment. For this reason, the entire scanner
assembly is replaceable only as a unit. Replacing the scanner
assembly as an entire assembly replaces the CCD scan module,
the CCD scan motor and cable. If the ADF fails, it too is replaceable
only as an entire assembly. Replacing the ADF replaces the ADF
cable and other ADF submechanisms.
112 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Separation of scanner from printer
As noted earlier, for service purposes, the upper part of the HP
LaserJet 3300mfp series is in effect “the scanner” and the lower part
is “the printer.” Together they also act as a photocopier or fax
machine, but the service description here is simplified by referring to
copier or fax functionality only if specifically necessary.
CAUTION
You must unplug the printer before separating the scanner from the
printer, or you might damage both the printer and the scanner.
Right side cover
1
Open the print cartridge door.
2
Open the straight-through output door.
3
Remove one screw (callout 1) to remove the right side cover.
2
1
Figure 22.
EN
Removing the right side cover (1 of 3)
Separation of scanner from printer 113
4
Lift the right side of the product and release the tab (callout 1) on
the bottom of the cover.
2
1
Figure 23.
Removing the right side cover (2 of 3)
114 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
5
Figure 24.
While continuing to press the release tab, grasp the back of the
cover, pull it out, backward, and guide it away from the front tabs.
Removing the right side cover (3 of 3)
Scanner side covers
1
Remove the two screws holding the right scanner side cover in
place (callout 1).
2
Slide the cover back and away.
2
1
Figure 25.
EN
Removing the right scanner cover
Separation of scanner from printer 115
3
Open the print cartridge door and the left side door to expose the
screws holding the left scanner side cover.
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the left scanner side cover.
2
1
Figure 26.
Removing the left scanner cover
5
Figure 27.
Disconnect the flat flexible cable from the scanner formatter PCA.
Thread it down through the slot and away from the slot.
Separating the scanner from the printer (1 of 4)
116 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
6
Remove two front screws from each side of the product; the
screw on the left side (callout 1) is directly opposite the screw on
the right side.
2
1
Figure 28.
Separating the scanner from the printer (2 of 4)
7
Remove the two screws from the back of the product (callout 1).
1
2
Figure 29.
EN
Separating the scanner from the printer (3 of 4)
Separation of scanner from printer 117
8
Figure 30.
Slide the scanner back and lift it upward to separate it from the
printer.
Separating the scanner from the printer (4 of 4)
118 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Scanner assemblies
Flat lid or ADF assembly
The scanner cover is either a flat lid or an Automatic Document Feed
(ADF) assembly. Removal of the ADF assembly is pictured here.
1
Open the cover
2
Slide up the two hinge-tab locking shims (callout 1).
Note
The flat lid has no hinge-tab locking shims.
3
Slightly close the cover while lifting up to gently remove it.
2
1
Figure 31.
EN
Removing the ADF assembly
Scanner assemblies 119
The ADF pick roller assembly
The upper pick roller assembly and document feed guide are user
replaceable parts, but the ADF separation pad is not. These
instructions appear in chapter 3 of this manual and are repeated here.
If the ADF has trouble picking paper, the ADF pick roller assembly
may need to be replaced:
1
1
Unplug the power cord from the
product. If you have a 220V product,
turn off the power switch.
2
2
Remove the input tray and open the
ADF cover.
3
Press the round green button while
lifting the green lever. Rotate the
green lever until it stops in the open
position. The old pickup roller
assembly should remain on the
black surface.
4
Remove the old assembly and put
the new one in exactly the same
place. The largest roller goes in
back, and the gear side will face
away from you.
3
4
120 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
5
5
Lower the green lever with the flat
green part fitting in between the
rollers. Press down on the green
lever until the assembly snaps into
place.
6
6
To check for proper installation, lift
the green lever until it remains open.
The new pickup roller assembly
should be secured to the lever
assembly and should not fall out.
7
7
Make sure that both sides of the
assembly are secured by the green
hooks.
8
Lower the green lever assembly and
close the ADF lid. Reinstall the input
tray.
8
If you are experiencing abnormal jams in the ADF, you may want to
replace the ADF assembly.
EN
Scanner assemblies 121
ADF document feed guide
Figure 32.
1
Open the ADF door.
2
With the upper pick assembly lever down, loosen the document
feed guide one side at a time, then gently pull the guide back to
remove.
Removing the document feed guide (1 of 2)
To reinstall
Make sure that both sides of the document feed guide are snapped
into place. Otherwise, ADF paper jams may occur.
Figure 33.
Removing the document feed guide (2 of 2)
122 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
ADF separation pad
Figure 34.
1
Open the ADF door. Lift the upper pick assembly lever.
2
Remove the two torx screws securing the ADF separation pad
using the #8 torx screwdriver.
Removing the ADF separation pad
3
EN
Pull gently on the rubber pad to lift out the ADF separation pad.
Scanner assemblies 123
Control panel bezel
1
Figure 35.
Remove the control panel bezel by lifting up on both sides of the
bezel edges until all the snaps are disengaged. Set the bezel
aside.
Removing the control panel bezel
To reinstall
1
Figure 36.
Reinstalling the control panel bezel (1 of 2)
2
Figure 37.
Align the new bezel at the lower notch. The bezel notch should
align to the inside of the product
Press down until all the snaps are engaged, and then press
outward until the bezel is secured.
Reinstalling the control panel bezel (2 of 2)
124 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Control panel
1
There are four sliding tabs at the top of the control panel. The
second tab from the right locks into place. Use a small
screwdriver to press down on the locking portion of the snap-fit
retaining the tab (callout 1) and slide the control panel to the right.
1
2
Figure 38.
Removing the control panel
2
Lift out gently. Disconnect the cable from the back of the control
panel.
To reinstall
Bias the control panel to the right until the four tabs are inserted. Then
slide the control panel to the left to lock in place. Make sure the snap
fit locks at the same tab shown above.
EN
Scanner assemblies 125
Control panel chassis
1
Remove three screws from the control panel chassis (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 39.
Removing the control panel chassis (1 of 2)
2
Remove the control panel chassis by lifting up on both sides of
the chassis to release tabs on the corners (callout 1), and pull the
chassis away from the scanner body.
1
2
Figure 40.
Note
Removing the control panel chassis (2 of 2)
The speaker and control panel cable are both replaceable parts.
Ensure that the control panel cable and speaker cable are correctly
routed on reinstallation.
126 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Scanner formatter
1
Remove the left scanner cover (page 115).
2
Disconnect five cables from the scanner formatter (callout 1).
3
Remove three screws (callout 2) and remove the scanner
formatter.
2
1
2
3
2
Figure 41.
Note
EN
Removing the scanner formatter
If the scanner and printer are not separated, one additional cable
(callout 3) will need to be disconnected.
Scanner assemblies 127
ADF scanner glass
1
Remove one screw (callout 1), lift plastic frame, and then lift out
glass.
2
1
Figure 42.
Removing the ADF scanner glass
To reinstall
Slide the ADF glass locking mechanism toward the back of the
scanner until it locks in place. Install the ADF glass. When you install
the frame for the ADF glass, the mechanism will release engaging the
locking mechanism and securing the glass.
Figure 43.
Installing the ADF scanner glass
128 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Printer covers
Left side door
1
Open the left side door.
2
Remove the screw in the center of the door hinge (callout 1).
1
2
Figure 44.
Removing the left side door
3
EN
Lift the door away.
Printer covers 129
Back cover
1
Note
Remove the right side cover (page 113) and open or remove the
left side door (page 129).
The back cover can be removed without removing the left side door,
but removing the back cover removes the support for the left side
door leaving it vulnerable to breakage.
2
Open the straight-through output door.
3
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the back of the product.
2
1
2
Figure 45.
Note
Removing the back cover (1 of 2)
The back cover has two tabs (not shown), one on the side of the
printer and one on the bottom. You may want to use a screwdriver
to press on the side tab (callout 2).
130 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
4
Press down and hold the two release levers (callout 1) and pull
off the back cover.
2
1
Figure 46.
EN
Removing the back cover (2 of 2)
Printer covers 131
Printer top cover
1
Separate the printer from the scanner (page 113). Remove the
left side door, right side cover, and back cover (pages 129
through 130), and open the print cartridge door.
2
Remove six screws (callout 1) on the top of the printer.
3
Lift the cover off the printer.
1
2
Figure 47.
Removing the printer top cover
132 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Front cover assembly
The front cover assembly is composed of three pieces:
the print cartridge door
the front cover (the frame that surrounds the main input tray)
the front guide assembly (the internal shelf that attaches the front
cover and the print cartridge door to the product)
Print cartridge door
1
Open the print cartridge door.
2
On both sides, pull the connecting links from the inside of the
print cartridge door (callout 1).
.
2
1
Figure 48.
Note
EN
Removing the print cartridge door (1 of 2)
If the links fall back or are pushed back into the printer when they
are disconnected from the print cartridge door, the interlocking
mechanism may come apart and require reassembly.
Printer covers 133
3
Detach the print cartridge door hinge (callout 1) on the right side
by flexing the hinge arm to the right. Then rock the print cartridge
door to the left to remove it.
2
1
Figure 49.
Removing the print cartridge door (2 of 2)
134 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Front cover
1
Remove the left side door (page 129), right side cover
(page 113), and print cartridge door (page 133).
2
Loosen two screws (one shown, callout 1), one on each side of
the cover.
2
1
Figure 50.
CAUTION
Removing the front cover (1 of 2)
In removing the front cover, be aware of all the tab locations to
guard against breakage (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 51.
EN
Front cover removed
Printer covers 135
3
Figure 52.
At the same time, push down on both the top center and bottom
center of the front cover until the top center tabs pop out of place.
Keep pressure on the bottom center of the panel to guard against
tab breakage.
Removing the front cover (2 of 2)
4
Pull the panel forward just far enough to release the remaining
tabs.
5
Rotate the bottom of the panel forward to remove.
136 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Printer assemblies
Front guide assembly
1
Open the left side door and remove the right cover (page 113),
the print cartridge door (page 133), and the front cover
(page 135).
2
From the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1).
1
2
Figure 53.
Removing the front guide assembly (1 of 3)
3
EN
On the right side, release the lower tab (callout 1), and the upper
tab (callout 2).
Printer assemblies 137
2
2
1
Figure 54.
Removing the front guide assembly (2 of 3)
4
On the left side, release the upper tab (callout 1) and the lower
tab (callout 2).
5
Remove the front guide assembly.
2
1
2
Figure 55.
Removing the front guide assembly (3 of 3)
138 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Left and right support covers (front corner brackets)
1
Remove the two screws holding the left support cover (one
shown in callout 1, one on the side) and one screw holding the
right support cover (callout 2). Lift up and rotate toward the front
to remove.
2
1
Figure 56.
EN
2
Removing the left and right support covers
Printer assemblies 139
Transfer roller
Note
Figure 57.
CAUTION
There is a small grounding spring underneath the right side of the
transfer roller. Do not misplace this grounding spring.
1
Open the print cartridge door and remove the print cartridge
(page 110).
2
Use needle-nose pliers to gently squeeze the two small tabs on
the transfer roller.
3
Lift the transfer roller up, slide it to the right, and lift it out of the
printer.
Removing the transfer roller
Do not touch the black sponge portion of the transfer roller.
140 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Line Interface Unit (LIU)
1
Open or remove the left side door (page 129).
2
Remove one screw at the left of the formatter board (callout 1).
3
Disconnect the flat flexible cable (callout 2) from the connector.
4
Rotate the LIU around the hooks to remove.
2
2
1
Figure 58.
EN
Removing the LIU
Printer assemblies 141
Formatter
Note
Removal of the LIU is not necessary to remove the formatter.
However, it may make reinstallation easier.
1
Open or remove the left side door (page 129).
2
Disengage the connector lock and disconnect the flat flexible
cable at the bottom of the formatter (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 59.
Removing the formatter (1 of 3)
142 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
3
Remove five screws (callout 1).
1
2
Figure 60.
Removing the formatter (2 of 3)
4
Rotate the bottom of the formatter up and off of the hooks on the
chassis and begin to remove it. After removing the bottom of the
formatter, disconnect the two flat flexible cables from connectors
at the top of the formatter, and unplug the scanner motor cable
from the formatter (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 61.
Removing the formatter (3 of 3)
To reinstall
When you reconnect the bottom cable, make sure you lock the ZIF
connector at the bottom of the formatter back into place.
EN
Printer assemblies 143
Fuser assembly
Note
1
Separate the scanner from the printer (see pages 113 through
118) and remove the left side door, back cover, and printer top
cover (pages 129, 130, and 132).
2
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the right fuser support plate.
3
Remove a third screw (callout 2) from behind the large gear on
the right fuser plate and remove it.
You can access the third screw through the holes in the 69T gear.
If you need to realign the 69T gear, you must first remove the
pressure roller gear. Release the tab (callout 3) and remove the
pressure roller gear.
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 62.
Removing the fuser assembly (1 of 4)
144 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
4
Remove three screws (callout 1) from the left fuser plate and
remove it.
2
1
Figure 63.
EN
Removing the fuser assembly (2 of 4)
Printer assemblies 145
5
Remove two screws (callout 1), one from each side of the printer.
2
1
Figure 64.
Removing the fuser assembly (3 of 4)
146 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
6
Unplug the fuser cable connector (callout 1) by pressing and
releasing the tab on the back of the connector.
7
Unplug five smaller cable connectors (callout 2) from the ECU
and unwind the cables from the fuser assembly.
8
Unplug the spade connector (callout 3).
9
Remove one screw (callout 4) from the paper-delivery sensor,
and lift out the paper-delivery sensor.
10 Gently lift out the fuser assembly.
2
4
2
1
2
3
2
Figure 65.
Removing the fuser assembly (4 of 4)
To reinstall
Remove the large gear from the end of the fuser assembly, return the
fuser assembly to the chassis, and replace the large gear.
EN
Printer assemblies 147
Output rollers
Facedown delivery assembly
1
Remove the fuser assembly (see page 144).
2
Remove two screws (callout 1) and lift the facedown delivery
assembly away from the fuser assembly.
1
2
Figure 66.
Removing the output rollers (1 of 2)
148 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Faceup roller
1
Turn the fuser assembly over.
2
Remove the gear (callout 1) from the faceup roller and release
the tab (callout 2) on the face-up roller bushing.
3
Rotate the faceup roller bushing forward until the pin releases.
4
Slide the faceup roller away from the gear side, and lift it out of
the fuser assembly.
2
1
2
Figure 67.
Removing the output rollers (2 of 2)
Reinstall note
Flex the faceup roller bushing to pop the pin back into place.
EN
Printer assemblies 149
Motor
Note
You might find it easier to remove the ECU pan (see page 164)
before you remove the motor.
1
Separate the scanner from the printer (see pages 113 through
118) and remove the left side door and back cover (pages 129
and 130).
2
Remove the fuser assembly (see page 144).
3
Disconnect the motor cable connector (callout 1) on the side of
the motor.
4
Remove the two screws (callout 2) from the motor and remove
the motor.
2
2
1
Figure 68.
Removing the motor
To reinstall
Make sure that the motor is in the correct position. The connector
should face the inside of the printer.
150 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Solenoid
1
Separate the scanner from the printer (see pages 113 through
118) and remove the left side door and back cover (pages 129
and 130).
2
Unplug five cable connectors (callout 1) from the ECU and
separate the solenoid cable from the other four cables.
3
Carefully unwind the solenoid cable from the cable guides
(callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 69.
EN
Removing the solenoid (1 of 2)
Printer assemblies 151
4
Remove the screw (callout 1) on the solenoid.
5
Gently thread the solenoid cable through the hole (callout 2) in
the right side plate.
6
Lift off the solenoid.
2
1
2
Figure 70.
Removing the solenoid (2 of 2)
To reinstall
It might be easier to remove the ECU pan (see page 164) before
rerouting the cables through the hole (callout 2) in the right side plate.
152 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Fan assembly
1
Separate the scanner from the printer (see pages 113 through
118) and remove the left side door and back cover (pages 129
and 130).
2
Unplug the five cable connectors (callout 1) from the ECU and
separate the fan cable from the other four cables.
3
Carefully unwind the fan cable from the cable guides (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 71.
EN
Removing the fan (1 of 2)
Printer assemblies 153
4
Remove two screws (callout 1).
5
Remove the fan assembly.
6
Gently thread the fan cable through the hole (callout 2) in the right
side plate.
7
Remove the fan assembly.
.
2
1
2
Figure 72.
Removing the fan (2 of 2)
To reinstall
It might be easier to remove the ECU pan (see page 164) before
rerouting the cables through the hole (callout 2) in the right side plate.
154 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Pickup assembly
1
Remove the right side cover, print cartridge door, front cover, and
front guide assembly (see pages 113, 133 through 138).
2
Remove one screw (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 73.
EN
Removing the pickup assembly plate (1 of 3)
Printer assemblies 155
3
Remove two screws (callout 1) on the top of the upper metal
shield.
2
1
Figure 74.
Removing the pickup assembly plate (2 of 3)
4
Lift the upper metal shield (callout 1) straight up and remove it.
5
Lift the lower metal shield (callout 2) straight up and remove it.
2
2
1
Figure 75.
Removing the pickup assembly plate (3 of 3)
156 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Paper lift-plate assembly and pickup roller
shaft
1
Remove the front cover, print cartridge door, and front guide
assembly (see pages 133 through 138).
2
Remove the pickup assembly (see page 155).
3
Release the locking tab on the pickup roller shaft as shown.
1
2
2
Figure 76.
Removing the paper lift-plate assembly (1 of 3)
4
EN
Slide the shaft toward the right until the left end releases.
Printer assemblies 157
5
Carefully angle the left end of the shaft back.
2
1
2
Figure 77.
Removing the paper lift-plate assembly (2 of 3)
6
Flip up the paper lift-plate and lift it straight up to remove it.
1
2
2
Figure 78.
Removing the paper lift-plate assembly (3 of 3)
158 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
To reinstall
Make sure that the vertical paper sensor (the narrow black plastic
piece to the left of the separation pad arm) is in an upright position.
Also, be sure the two springs are correctly positioned under the plate.
The springs rest under the lift-plate and they encircle the metal tabs
shown in the picture (callouts 1 and 2).
2
2
1
Figure 79.
Paper lift-plate springs
7
Figure 80.
EN
If desired, remove the pickup roller shaft by carefully angling the
left side out.
Removing the pickup roller shaft
Printer assemblies 159
To reinstall
Be sure to align the clutch on the pickup roller shaft with the follower
(large plastic tab) on the paper lift-plate.
Right plate assembly
Note
Figure 81.
1
Separate the scanner from the printer (see pages 113 through
118) and remove the left side door and back cover (pages 129
and 130).
2
Remove the front cover, print cartridge door, and front guide
assembly (see pages 133 through 138).
3
Remove the solenoid (see page 151).
4
Remove the fan assembly (see page 153).
5
Press the small white tab to release the clutch (see inset—you
may need to use a small screwdriver), and slide the clutch to the
left (toward the pickup roller).
Make sure that the two halves of the clutch stay together. If they
separate, you might lose the clutch spring.
Removing the right plate assembly (1 of 2)
160 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
6
Note
Remove seven screws (callout 1).
If you have not already removed the fuser, remove the fuser screw
and the largest gear on the fuser (already removed from photo),
and the 69T gear (callout 2).
7
Remove the right plate assembly.
2
1
2
Figure 82.
EN
Removing the right plate assembly (2 of 2)
Printer assemblies 161
Left plate assembly
1
Separate the scanner from the printer (see pages 113 through
118) and remove the left side door and back cover (pages 129
and 130).
2
Remove the front cover, the print cartridge door, and the front
guide assembly (see pages 133 through 138).
3
Remove the formatter (see page 142).
4
Remove six screws (callout 1). If you have not already removed
the fuser, remove the fuser screw (callout 2).
5
Remove the left plate assembly.
2
1
2
Figure 83.
Removing the left plate assembly
162 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
Bottom assemblies
Left bottom frame support
1
Open the left side door.
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 84.
EN
Removing the left bottom frame support
3
Disconnect the locking connector and free the flat flexible cable
from the bottom of the formatter.
4
Remove the left bottom frame support.
Bottom assemblies 163
ECU fuses and ECU pan
1
Note
Remove the right side cover and the back cover (pages 130 and
163).
The two fuses on the ECU can now be accessed and replaced, if
necessary, without removing the ECU pan. The fuse closest to the
back of the product is 10A for the 110V model and 20A for the 220V
model. The other fuse is 2.5A, 110V for both models (callout 3 in
Figure 89).
2
Remove the left bottom frame support (page 113).
3
Unplug the three spade connectors (callout 1).
4
Disconnect the motor cable connector (callout 2) on the side of
the motor.
5
Unplug the fuser cable connector (callout 3) by pressing and
releasing the tab on the back of the connector.
6
Unplug all other cable connectors (callout 4) from the ECU.
2
1
2
2
3
2
4
Figure 85.
Removing the ECU pan (1 of 5)
164 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
7
Disengage the flat flexible connector from the formatter and
disconnect the flat flexible cable (callout 1). Remove one screw
(callout 2) on the left side of the printer.
2
2
1
Figure 86.
Removing the ECU pan (2 of 5)
8
Remove two screws (callout 1) on the right side of the printer.
2
1
Figure 87.
EN
Removing the ECU pan (3 of 5)
Bottom assemblies 165
9
Note
Gently lift the ECU pan in the printer and slide it backward to free
it from the pins on the inside of the printer (callout 1).
The entire ECU board can be replaced as a single unit. (Only
soldered cables ship with the replacement board; if other cables
are damaged during removal, you will have to purchase new ones.)
1
2
Figure 88.
Removing the ECU pan (4 of 5)
166 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
10 Remove five screws (callout 1).
11 Unclip the wire from the connector (callout 2).
12 Lift the ECU out of the ECU pan.
2
2
3
2
1
Figure 89.
Note
EN
Removing the ECU pan (5 of 5)
Callout 3 in the figure above shows the two fuses on the ECU (see
the note on page 164).
Bottom assemblies 167
Paper-feed assembly
1
Separate the scanner from the printer (see pages 113 through
118) and remove the left side door and back cover (pages 129
and 130).
2
Remove the right plate assembly (see page 160).
3
Remove the ECU pan (see page 164).
4
Unwind the fan and solenoid cables from the cable guides
(callout 1) on the paper-feed mechanism.
5
Remove two screws (callout 2) from the paper-feed mechanism.
6
Remove one screw (callout 3) from the paper-sensor PCB
assembly.
2
3
2
2
1
Figure 90.
Removing the paper-feed assembly (1 of 4)
168 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
7
Separate two bushings (on the bottom of the paper-feed
mechanism) from the paper-feed roller shaft (callout 1), and lift up
and out the paper-feed mechanism.
2
1
2
Figure 91.
Removing the paper-feed assembly (2 of 4)
To reinstall
Insert the bottom of the sensor flag into the hole (callout 2) in front of
the paper-feed roller shaft.
(See page 171 for more reinstallation notes.)
EN
Bottom assemblies 169
8
Note
Use needle-nose pliers to push the two tabs away from the end of
the paper-feed roller shaft.
You might find it easier to first remove the right plate assembly (see
page 160).
Do not remove the gear shield, because the gears and springs can
easily separate and become misplaced.
9
Figure 92.
Pull the paper-feed roller shaft toward the left side of the product
and remove it.
Removing the paper-feed mechanism (3 of 4)
170 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
To reinstall
1
Insert the two tabs (callout 1) on the paper-feed assembly into the
two recesses.
2
Insert the bottom of the sensor flag into the hole in front of the
paper-feed roller shaft (see callout 2 on page 169). The top of the
sensor flag (callout 2) should move freely.
2
1
2
Figure 93.
EN
Removing the paper-feed mechanism (4 of 4)
Bottom assemblies 171
172 Chapter 5 - Removal and replacement
EN
6
Troubleshooting
Chapter contents
Basic troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Critical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving image-quality problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving paper-feed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving print paper-feed problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving scanner (copier) paper-feed problems . . . . . . . .
Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half self-test functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum rotation functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating element check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-voltage power supply check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper path check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating or recovering the firmware code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware update via flash executable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware recovery DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing all fax reports at once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T.30 protocol trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secondary service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developer’s menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVRAM init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PJL software commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repetitive image defect ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations of connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations of connectors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
174
178
178
185
187
188
197
197
199
200
200
201
202
203
204
206
207
207
207
209
209
209
210
229
229
230
233
233
236
237
239
240
Chapter contents 173
Basic troubleshooting
Table 15. Basic troubleshooting
#
Verification steps
Possible problems
Solutions
1
Is Power On
successful?
No power due to failed
power source, cable,
switch, or fuse.
1. Verify that the product is plugged in.
2. Verify that the power cable is functional
and that the power switch is on (220v only).
3. Verify that FU102 on the ECU is not
open.
4. If all of these conditions are correct,
replace the ECU.
Printer motor does not
rotate.
1. Verify that the toner cartridge is present.
2. Verify that the product doors are closed.
3. Verify that paper is loaded in the paper
input tray.
4. Verify that the printer path paper sensors
are functional.
5. Verify that the motor connector J1 is
seated into the ECU.
6. Verify that the motor is correctly mounted
to the product chassis.
7. If all of these conditions are correct,
replace the ECU.
8. If, after replacing the ECU, the printer
motor still does not rotate, replace the
motor.
ADF motor does not
rotate or scanner bulb
does not light.
1. Verify that the scanner connector is
seated in the formatter and scanner
formatter.
2. Check all cabling on the scanner
formatter.
3. If the ADF motor still does not rotate,
replace the ADF.
4. If the scanner bulb still does not light,
replace the scanner assembly.
5. If the problem persists, replace parts one
at a time in the following order until the
problem is resolved: scanner formatter,
formatter, and finally the ECU.
When the product is
connected to a grounded
power source,
Hewlett Packard
is displayed with moving
cursors indicating that the
firmware code is loading,
and the printer motor
rotates for approximately
five seconds. When the
firmware is done loading
(30-40 seconds after
power-on), Scanner
bulb management
is displayed and the scan
head moves back and
forth for 10-15 seconds. If
you lift the lid, you will
see that the scanner bulb
is lit. Near the end of this
time, the ADF motor turns
on for about two seconds.
174 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 15. Basic troubleshooting (continued)
#
Verification steps
2
Is the product ready? Control panel displays an
3
The control panel should
function without error
messages.
Do engine tests and
self-tests print?
Print an engine test,
which is explained on
page 200. The engine
test should print without
paper-feed problems or
print-quality problems.
Also print a configuration
report (See “Internal
reports” on page 209.).
EN
Possible problems
error.
Solutions
Consult the list of common messages later
in this chapter to correct the error.
Control panel is not
functional.
Verify that the control panel cable is seated
into both the control panel and the scanner
formatter. Also check the connections
between the scanner formatter and the
formatter. If all cables are undamaged and
seated correctly but the problem persists,
replace the control panel.
Control panel display is
blank, but the LEDs are
lit.
1. On units that allow for firmware recovery,
recover the firmware using the recovery
DIMM.
2. If the problem persists, replace the
control panel.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
scanner formatter PCA.
4. If the problem persists, replace the
formatter.
Control panel display and
LEDs function, but keys
do not work.
Replace the control panel.
Note
The formatter must be connected to
perform an engine test.
Engine test is successful,
but the configuration
report does not print.
Replace the formatter.
Engine test is not
successful.
Replace the ECU.
Control panel displays an
error message.
Consult the list of common messages in
chapter 2 or the list of error messages in
this chapter to correct the error.
Media does not move
smoothly through the
printer paper path.
Isolate printer paper-path problems by
performing a paper-path check, which is
discussed later in this chapter.
Poor print quality.
See “Solving image-quality problems” on
page 188.
Basic troubleshooting 175
Table 15. Basic troubleshooting (continued)
#
Verification steps
Possible problems
Solutions
4
Is the copy function
operational?
Poor copy quality from
the flatbed.
1. If the print quality from the internal tests
and the copy from the ADF were
acceptable, clean the flatbed glass.
2. If, after performing the maintenance, the
problem persists, replace the scanner
assembly.
Poor copy quality from
the ADF.
1. If the print quality from the internal tests
and the copy from the flatbed were
acceptable, clean or, if damaged, replace
the ADF scanner glass.
2. If the problem persists, replace the
scanner assembly.
Media does not move
smoothly through the
ADF path.
Clean the ADF pick roller and ADF
separation pad. If the problem persists,
replace the ADF pick roller and ADF
separation pad. If the problem persists,
replace the ADF.
The telephone line is not
operational or the product
is not plugged into the
telephone line.
Make sure that the product is plugged into a
telephone line that you know works.
The phone cord is faulty
or is plugged into the
wrong connector.
Try plugging the phone cord into the other
connector. Try a new cord.
The product’s fax settings
are set incorrectly.
Review and reset the product’s fax settings.
The flat flexible cable
between the formatter
and the LIU is damaged
or incorrectly seated.
Inspect and reseat or replace the flat
flexible cable between the LIU and the
formatter.
The LIU is not
operational.
Replace the LIU. If the problem persists,
replace the formatter.
Too many telephone
devices are plugged in, or
telephone devices are not
connected in the correct
order.
Make sure that the product is the only
device on the telephone line and try again
to receive the fax.
The product’s fax settings
are set incorrectly.
Review and reset the product’s fax settings.
The flat flexible cable
between the formatter
and the LIU is damaged
or incorrectly seated.
Inspect and reseat or replace the flat
flexible cable between the LIU and the
formatter.
The LIU is not
operational.
Replace the LIU. If the problem persists,
replace the formatter.
Place the configuration
report into the ADF and
make a copy. The report
should feed smoothly
through the ADF and
copies should print
without print-quality
problems. Make a copy
from the flatbed as well.
5
Does the LaserJet
3330mfp send a fax?
Connect the phone line
and verify the dial tone
(using a hand set, if
necessary). Attempt to
send a fax.
6
Does the LaserJet
3330mfp receive a
fax?
Use another fax machine
to send a fax to the
LaserJet 3330mfp.
176 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 15. Basic troubleshooting (continued)
#
Verification steps
Possible problems
Solutions
7
Is the software
installed correctly?
Software is not installed
or an error occurred
during software
installation.
Uninstall and then reload the product
software. Make sure you use the correct
installation procedure and the correct port
setting.
8
Does the product
print from the
computer?
The cable is not
connected correctly.
Reconnect the cable.
An incorrect driver is
selected.
Select the proper driver.
Other devices are
connected to the parallel
port.
Disconnect the other devices and try again
to print.
There is an LPT port
driver problem in
Microsoft Windows.
Reset the computer’s port settings.
Connect the parallel
cable or USB cable to the
product and the
computer. Use a wordprocessing application to
send a print job to the
product.
9
EN
The formatter has failed.
Replace the formatter.
Does the product
scan to the
computer?
Other devices are
connected to the parallel
port.
Disconnect the other devices and try again
to scan.
Initiate a scan from either
the computer’s basic
desktop software or from
the product.
The computer’s parallelport hardware is not
bidirectional.
Check hardware documentation to see if
the port configuration can be changed.
The BIOS settings for the
parallel port are set
incorrectly.
Polling is turned off in
HP LaserJet Director or
HP LaserJet Director is
not running.
Reset the computer’s port settings. If the
problem persists, reset the BIOS settings in
CMOS.
Start HP LaserJet Director and turn on
polling.
Basic troubleshooting 177
Errors
Control panel messages
The majority of the control panel messages are intended to guide the
user through normal operation. The control panel displays the status
of the current operation, including a page count on the second line of
the display if appropriate. When the product is receiving fax data,
print data, or scanning commands, the control panel displays
messages to these affects. In addition, the product displays alert
messages, warning messages, and critical error messages.
Alert and warning messages
Alert and warning messages are displayed temporarily and may
require acknowledgement by pressing menu/enter to resume or
cancel. With certain warnings, the completion of a job or the quality
of the output may be affected. If the alert or warning message is
related to printing and the auto-continue is on, the product will attempt
to resume the printing job after displaying the warning for 10 seconds
without acknowledgement.
Table 16. Alert and warning messages
Message
Cleaning Mode.
Wait 1-3 Min.
Fax Busy.
Canceled Send
Possible causes
Solutions
The product is running an internal
cleaning cycle.
Wait for the product to finish the cleaning
cycle. The message will clear when the
cycle is finished.
The fax line to which you were
sending a fax was busy. The
product has cancelled sending
the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that fax
machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax
number.
Check that the Redial On Busy option is
enabled.
Unplug the product telephone cord from
the wall, plug in a telephone, and try
making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
178 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 16. Alert and warning messages (continued)
Message
### Is Empty
[Enter] To Add
Possible causes
Solutions
The one-touch key or speed-dial
code has not been programmed
and therefore cannot be added to
a group.
Press menu/enter to program the onetouch or speed-dial. If you want to
program a group-dial, press cancel and
use the control panel menu to create a
new group. Press cancel if you do not
want to program the one-touch or speeddial.
###: [Group Name] The product is waiting for you to
Phbook/SpeedDial press a programmed one-touch
key or enter a speed-dial code to
a group-dial code.
Canceled Copy.
Clear Document
The cancel key was pressed to
cancel the current job while
pages were feeding from the
document feeder. The cancel
process will not automatically
clear the document feeder.
Pull the document release door open,
remove the jammed item, and close the
door. Then, clear the items in the
document feeder tray and start over.
Canceled Scan.
Clear Document
The cancel key was pressed to
cancel the current job while
pages were feeding from the
document feeder. The cancel
process will not automatically
clear the document feeder.
Pull the document release door open,
remove the jammed item, and close the
door. Then, clear the items in the
document feeder tray and start over.
Canceled Send.
Clear Document
The cancel key was pressed to
cancel the current job while
pages were feeding from the
document feeder tray. The cancel
process will not automatically
clear the document feeder.
Pull the document release door open,
remove the jammed item, and close the
door. Then, clear the items in the
document feeder tray and start over.
Comm. Error
Fax communication error
occurred between the product
and the sender or receiver. For
descriptions of communication
errors see table 22, “Fax receive
error codes,” on page 211, and
table 23, “Fax send error codes,”
on page 216.
Allow the product to retry sending the
fax.
Unplug the product telephone cord from
the wall, plug in a telephone, and try
making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
The product is currently in use.
Wait for the product to finish the current
job.
There was an internal error in the
product.
Press menu/enter to resume the job.
Device Busy.
Try Again Later
Device Error.
[Enter] To Cont.
EN
Begin adding fax numbers to the groupdial code. See “Programming group-dial
codes” in the User Guide on the product
CD.
Errors 179
Table 16. Alert and warning messages (continued)
Message
Possible causes
Solutions
A piece of media is jammed in the
document feeder tray.
Open the document release door, clear
the jam, close the document release
door, and reload the paper into the
document feeder tray.
If the error persists, replace the ADF
separation pad and ADF pickup roller.
Document Feeder
Mispick. Reload
Media in the document feeder
tray was not picked up.
Remove and reload the media into the
document feeder tray.
If the error persists, replace the ADF pick
roller and ADF separation pad.
Door Open Or No
Print Cartridge
The print cartridge door is open
or the print cartridge is not
installed properly.
1. Check that the print cartridge door and
left-side door are completely closed.
2. Check that the print cartridge is
correctly installed. (See “Print cartridge”
on page 110 for more information.)
3. Check that the door and print cartridge
interlocks are operating correctly. (See
"Paper path check" on page 206 for
more information about the door
interlock.)
The product experienced an
internal communication error.
Warning message only. Job output may
be affected.
Fax Busy.
Redial Pending
The fax line to which you were
sending a fax was busy. The
product automatically redials the
busy number. (See “Changing
how the product redials” in the
User Guide on the product CD.)
Allow the product to retry sending the
fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that fax
machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax
number.
Unplug the product telephone cord from
the wall, plug in a telephone, and try
making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
Fax Memory Full
Canceling Recv
During the fax transmission, the
product ran out of memory. Only
the pages that fit into memory will
be printed.
Print all of the faxes and have the sender
resend the fax. Cancel all fax jobs or
clear the faxes from memory (see
“Clearing faxes from memory” in the
User Guide on the product CD).
Fax Memory Full
Canceling Send
During the fax job, the memory
filled. All pages of the fax have to
be in memory for a fax job to work
correctly. Only the pages that fit
into memory were sent.
Print all received faxes or wait until all
pending faxes are sent. Cancel all fax
jobs or clear the faxes from memory (see
“Clearing faxes from memory” in the
User Guide on the product CD).
Doc Feeder Jam
Engine Comm.
Error
180 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 16. Alert and warning messages (continued)
Message
Possible causes
Solutions
Fax Recv Error
An error occurred while trying to
receive a fax.
Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Try faxing back to the sender or another
fax machine.
Check that the telephone cord is
securely connected by unplugging and
replugging the cord.
Check for a dial tone on the phone line
by pressing fax/send.
Make sure the phone is working by
disconnecting the product, plugging in a
telephone to the phone line, and making
a voice call.
Connect the product to a different phone
line.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
Fax Send Error
An error occurred while trying to
send a fax.
Try resending the fax.
Try faxing to another fax number.
Check that the telephone cord is
securely connected by unplugging and
replugging the cord.
Check for a dial tone on the phone line
by pressing fax/send.
Make sure the phone is working by
disconnecting the product, plugging in a
telephone to the phone line, and making
a voice call.
Connect the product to a different phone
line.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
Fit to Page on
Flatbed Only
Fit to Page does not work when
the ADF is being used.
Use the flatbed or choose another
reduction/enlargement setting.
Group Dial Not
Allowed In Group
The speed-dial code you entered
is programmed for a group.
Adding a group-dial to another
group-dial is not allowed.
Enter one-touch keys (programmed as
an individual speed dial) or speed-dial
codes to a group-dial
Group Is Full.
[Fax] To Start
The maximum number of fax
numbers that can be added to an
ad hoc group is 20.
Resend to the ad hoc group using less
fax numbers.
Invalid Date
An invalid date was entered, such
as June 35.
Reenter the date.
Invalid data or response.
Correct the entry.
The product memory has been
almost completely filled.
Allow the product to finish the job or
press cancel to cancel the job.
Invalid Entry
Memory Low.
Press [Cancel]
EN
Errors 181
Table 16. Alert and warning messages (continued)
Message
Possible causes
Solutions
Memory Low.1
Copy.
Press [Cancel]
The product completed making
one copy. The remaining copies
have been canceled because of
low product memory.
Press cancel to clear the error.
Use the HP LaserJet Director to make
multiple copies of large documents, or
break the job into smaller jobs containing
fewer pages.
Memory Low
Only 1 Copy Made
The product does not have
enough memory to complete the
collated copy job.
Continue completing the collated copy
job.
The product could not detect a
dial tone.
Unplug the telephone cord from both the
product and the wall and replug the cord.
Unplug the product telephone cord from
the wall, plug in a telephone, and try
making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
See “Changing the detect dial tone
setting” in the User Guide on the product
CD.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
If, after replacing the LIU, the error
persists, replace the formatter.
No Document Sent
The fax forwarding setting is on
and the product was
unsuccessful at receiving a fax
because of low memory or some
other reason. The product
deleted the partially received fax
data and did not attempt to
forward it.
Print the faxes in memory and have the
sender resend the missing page(s) of the
document.
No Fax Answer.
Canceled Send
Attempts to redial a fax number
failed or the “Redial on no
answer” option was turned off.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax
machine is on and ready. Check that you
are dialing the correct fax number. Check
that the redial option is enabled. Unplug
the telephone cord from both the product
and the wall and replug the cord. Unplug
the product telephone cord from the wall,
plug in a telephone, and try making a
call. Plug the product phone cord into a
jack for another phone line.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
No Dial Tone.
182 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 16. Alert and warning messages (continued)
Message
Possible causes
Solutions
You tried to send a fax, but the
receiving fax line did not answer.
The product attempts to redial
after a few minutes.
Allow the product to retry sending the
fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax
machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax
number.
Check that the Redial-No Answer option
is enabled.
Unplug the product telephone cord from
the wall, plug in a telephone, and try
making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
The product answered the
incoming call but did not detect
that a fax machine was calling.
Allow the product to retry receiving the
fax.
Unplug the product telephone cord from
the wall, plug in a telephone, and try
making a call.
Plug the product phone cord into a jack
for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
If the error persists, check the flat flexible
cable between the LIU and the formatter.
Reseat or replace the cable.
If the error persists, replace the LIU.
The product attempted to execute
“Reprint Last Fax” when nothing
was in memory.
Receive a fax before attempting to use
this option.
Not Enough
Memory.Try Later
There is not enough memory to
start a new job.
Wait until the current job is finished
before starting a new job.
Out of Range
An invalid number was entered.
Correct the entry.
Printer Jam.
Clear Paper Path
The product has detected a jam.
Clear the jam. The job should continue to
print. If it does not, try reprinting the job.
If media jams frequently, see Chapter 3,
“Maintenance.”
Printer Mispick
[Enter]To Resume
The print engine has failed to pick
up a piece of media.
Reload the paper in the paper input tray
and press menu/enter to continue the
job. If the error persists, replace the
printer pickup roller.
The paper input tray is empty.
Load media. If media is already loaded,
remove it. Check for and remove any
jam, and then reload the stack of media
in the paper input tray.
No Fax Answer.
Redial Pending
No Fax Detected
No Fax Pages
To Reprint
Printer Tray Is
Empty.Add Paper
EN
Errors 183
Table 16. Alert and warning messages (continued)
Message
Scanner Reserved
For PC Scan
Scanning Error.
Cannot Connect
Settings Cleared
Time/Date is in
Past.Try Again
Possible causes
Solutions
The product is being used to
create a scan by a computer.
Wait until the PC scan has finished, or
cancel the scan from the computer
software, or press cancel.
The product cannot transmit scan
information to a computer.
Check the connection cable and try the
scan again.
The product has cleared job
settings.
Reenter any desired job settings.
Invalid time or date entry.
Enter the correct time or date.
184 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Critical error messages
Critical error messages may indicate some kind of failure. Cycling the
power may fix the problem. If a critical error persists, the product may
require service.
Table 17. Critical error messages
Message
Cause
Solution
50 Fuser Error
The product has experienced an
internal hardware error.
Disconnect the power cable from the
product, wait at least 20 minutes, then
reconnect the power cable and wait for
the product to initialize.
Check the cabling connections to the
heating element.
Perform the heating element check (see
page 203).
If the error persists, replace the heating
element.
If, after replacing the heating element,
the error persists, replace the ECU.
51 Laser Error
The product has experienced an
internal hardware error.
Disconnect the power cable from the
product, wait at least 30 seconds, then
reconnect the power cable and wait for
the product to initialize.
Check the cabling connections to the
laser scanner assembly.
Try connecting the product to a different
power source or surge protector.
If the error persists, replace the laser
scanner assembly.
52 Scanner Error
The product has experienced an
internal hardware error.
Disconnect the power cable from the
product, wait at least 30 seconds, then
reconnect the power cable and wait for
the product to initialize.
Try connecting the product to a different
power source or surge protector.
If the error persists, replace the laser
scanner assembly.
79 Error
PowerOff>PowerOn
The product has experienced an
internal firmware error.
Disconnect the power cable from the
product, wait at least 30 seconds, then
reconnect the power cable and wait for
the product to initialize.
If the error persists, upgrade the
firmware (page 207).
EN
Errors 185
Table 17. Critical error messages (continued)
Message
ADF Door Open
Cause
Solution
The ADF door is open or a sensor
is malfunctioning.
Make sure the ADF door is closed.
If the message persists, disconnect the
power cable from the product, wait at
least 30 seconds, then reconnect the
power cable and wait for the product to
initialize. Try another power source.
If the message persists, open the ADF
door and press down the spring-metal
arm at the back of the ADF (connected to
the ADF door sensor), If the ADF door
sensor is functioning, the display will
change to read “Document Loaded.”
If the sensor is not functioning, replace
the ADF.
CCD Scanner Error The scanner assembly
experienced an internal error.
Scanner Bulb
Failure
The scanner assembly
experienced an error in scanner
bulb functionality.
186 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
Disconnect the power cable from the
product, wait at least 30 seconds, then
reconnect the power cable and wait for
the product to initialize. Try another
power source. If the error persists,
replace the scanner assembly.
Disconnect the power cable from the
product, wait at least 30 seconds, then
reconnect the power cable and wait for
the product to initialize. Try another
power source.
If the error persists, lift the cover to see if
the scanner bulb is lighting. If it is not
lighting, replace the scanner assembly.
If the bulb is lighting, the scan module
may be too far to the right to find the
calibration strip during startup. Follow
this procedure to move the scan module
so it begins the startup cycle farther to
the left:
1. Cycle the power and watch the
movement of the scan module. The scan
module will move to the left and the bulb
will light. When it does, cycle the power.
2. Repeat the first step until the scan
module is about three centimeters (about
an inch) from the right edge of the scan
glass.
3. Plug in the unit.
If the error persists, replace the scanner
assembly.
EN
Checking the print cartridge
Image formation defects are frequently the result of problems in the
print cartridge. If there is any doubt, always replace the print cartridge
before troubleshooting image defects.
Use the following checklist to make sure that the print cartridge is still
operable.
Make sure that the print cartridge is seated properly.
Inspect the print cartridge for toner level.
Check the expiration date stamped on the print cartridge box.
Check the print cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or
refilled.
Inspect the print cartridge to see if toner is leaking through worn
seals.
Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge to
see if it has been damaged or scratched. Touching the drum
contaminates the photosensitive surface and can cause spotting
and image defects.
Blurred areas on printed pages indicate that the photosensitive
drum in the cartridge has been overexposed to light. Because
overexposure to light causes permanent damage to the
photosensitive drum, the cartridge should be replaced.
Note
A print cartridge weighs approximately 863 gm. (30.5 oz.) when it
is full, approximately 766 gm. (27.0 oz.) when it first fades, and
approximately 742 gm. (26.2 oz.) when it is empty.
To redistribute toner in the print cartridge
Before installing a new print cartridge or when toner begins to run
low, redistribute the toner by rotating the cartridge back and forth five
or six times.
EN
Errors 187
Solving image-quality problems
Use the following tables to help solve problems with printed pages.
If the problem occurs when printing, see table 18, “Solving print
image-quality problems,” on page 188.
If the problem occurs when copying or scanning, see table 19,
“Solving scanning (copying) image-quality problems,” on page 194.
Also, see table 20, “Solving print paper-feed problems,” on page 197
and “Solving scanner (copier) paper-feed problems” on page 199.
Solving print image-quality problems
Table 18. Solving print image-quality problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Pages do not
print.
The product is not plugged in.
Make sure that the product is plugged
into a live wall outlet or power strip.
The computer cable is loose.
Check that the parallel cable between
the product and the computer is securely
connected.
The tape was not removed from the print
cartridge.
Remove the print cartridge, remove the
tape, and return the print cartridge. See
“Print cartridge” on page 110.
The print cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the print cartridge. (See “Print
cartridge” on page 110.)
The media you are using does not meet
HP’s specifications (for example, it is too
moist or too rough).
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The product cannot print to the edge of
the paper. The printer has minimum
margins on each edge of 4.23 mm (0.167
in.
To get the image to fit into this printable
area, slightly reduce the size of the
image.
The reduction setting is set incorrectly.
Check the reduction setting in the “Print”
or “Setup” window from within the
program you are using.
Parts of the
page around
the edges are
not printing.
188 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 18. Solving print image-quality problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Toner specks
appear on the
printed page.
.
The media you are using does not meet
HP’s specifications (for example, it is too
moist or too rough).
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The print path needs to be cleaned.
Clean the print path. (See “Cleaning the
print path” on page 59.)
Characters
are only
partially
printed (also
referred to as
dropouts).
A single sheet of paper is defective.
Try reprinting the job.
The print density needs to be adjusted.
Adjust the print density from the device
configuration utility.
The moisture content of the paper is
inconsistent, or the paper has moist or
wet spots on the surface.
Make sure that the media meets HP’s
specifications.
The paper was damaged by inconsistent
manufacturing processes.
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
A draft mode or economy mode is
selected in the software.
Try the normal or best setting.
The print cartridge is defective.
Replace the print cartridge.
The priority input tray is not in place.
Adjust the priority input tray.
The photosensitive drum inside the print
cartridge is scratched.
Replace the print cartridge.
The fuser is damaged or has an
obstruction.
Replace the fuser.
Vertical lines
appear on the
printed page.
EN
Errors 189
Table 18. Solving print image-quality problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
The printed
page has a
gray
background.
The priority input tray is not in place.
Adjust the priority input tray.
The print density setting is too high.
Decrease the amount of background
shading through the device configuration
utility.
The media basis weight is too high.
Change the media to a lower basis
weight.
The humidity level is too low.
Very low humidity can increase the
amount of background shading. Move
the product to a different location, or
decrease the background shading
through the device configuration utility.
The print cartridge needs to be replaced.
Replace the print cartridge.
If the toner smears appear on the leading
edge of the media, the media guides are
dirty.
Wipe the media guides with a dry, lintfree cloth.
The media you are using does not meet
HP’s specifications (for example, it is too
moist or too rough).
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The print cartridge needs to be replaced.
Replace the print cartridge.
The fuser temperature is too low.
Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of
the driver. Make sure that it is set for the
appropriate media.
Perform the heating element check (see
page 203).
If the error persists, replace the heating
element.
If, after replacing the heating element,
the error persists, replace the ECU.
Toner smears
appear on the
printed page.
190 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 18. Solving print image-quality problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
The toner is
loose, and it
does not stay
attached to
the printed
page.
The inside of the printer is dirty.
Clean the print path. (See “Cleaning the
print path” on page 59.)
The media you are using does not meet
HP’s specifications (for example, it is too
moist or too rough).
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The print cartridge needs to be replaced.
Replace the print cartridge.
The driver is not set for the correct
media.
1. Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab
of the driver. Select the correct media.
2. Select the correct media through the
device configuration utility.
The power strip is not working correctly.
Plug the product directly into an AC
outlet.
The fuser temperature is too low.
Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of
the driver. Make sure that it is set for the
appropriate media.
Perform the heating element check (see
page 203).
If the error persists, replace the heating
element.
If, after replacing the heating element,
the error persists, replace the ECU.
If the repetitive mark occurs at equal
distance between marks, either the print
cartridge or a printer roller is damaged.
Use the defect ruler to identify the
spacing. Check the appropriate
component and replace if necessary.
(See “Repetitive image defect ruler” on
page 236.)
The internal parts have toner on them.
If the defects occur on the back of the
page, the problem will probably correct
itself after a few more printed pages.
Repetitive
vertical
defects
appear on the
printed page.
Otherwise, clean the printer. (See
“Cleaning the print path” on page 59.)
The driver is not set for the correct
media.
EN
1. Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab
of the driver. Select the correct media.
(This affects the current print job only.)
2. Select the correct media through the
device configuration utility.
Errors 191
Table 18. Solving print image-quality problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Characters
are poorly
formed and
are producing
hollow
images.
The media is too slick.
Try a different media. Make sure that the
media meets specifications detailed in
the Print Media Guide for the
HP LaserJet family.
The driver is not set for the correct
media.
1. Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab
of the driver. Select the correct media.
(This affects the current print job only.)
2. Select the correct media through the
device configuration utility.
Pages are
skewed.
The media is loaded incorrectly.
Reload the media, and make sure that
the media guides are not too tight or too
loose against the media stack.
The input tray is too full.
Remove some of the sheets. The main
input tray can hold up to 250 sheets of
20-lb. (75 g/m2) bond weight paper (less
for heavier paper) or from 20 to 30
envelopes. The priority input tray can
hold up to ten sheets of 20-lb. (75 g/m2)
bond weight paper (one sheet of heavier
paper) or one envelope.
The type and quality of media you are
using does not meet HP’s specifications.
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The environment is too warm or too
humid.
1. Both high temperatures and high
humidity levels cause media to curl.
Move the product to a different
environment.
2. Use a different media. Make sure that
the media meets specifications detailed
in the Print Media Guide for the
HP LaserJet family.
The media was in the input tray for too
long.
Turn the stack of media over and put it
back in the tray.
The printed
page has curls
or waves.
Rotate the media 180° and put it back in
the tray.
The standard paper path is not working
correctly.
Open the straight-through output door on
the back of the product and use this
paper path.
The fuser temperature is too high.
Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of
the driver. Make sure that it is set for the
appropriate media.
192 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 18. Solving print image-quality problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Large
amounts of
toner are
scattered
around the
characters.
The media resistivity is too high.
1. Use a different media. Make sure that
the media meets specifications detailed
in the Print Media Guide for the
HP LaserJet family.
2. Turn the stack of media over and put it
back in the tray.
3. Use media that is designed for laser
printers.
Vertical white
stripes
appear.
The media you are using does not meet
HP’s specifications (for example, it is too
moist or too rough).
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The toner is low.
Gently shake the print cartridge back and
forth to redistribute the toner.
EN
Errors 193
Solving scanning (copying) image-quality problems
Table 19. Solving scanning (copying) image-quality problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Pages do not
print.
The product is not plugged in.
Make sure that the product is plugged
into a live wall outlet or power strip.
The computer cable is loose.
Check that the cable between the
product and the computer is securely
connected.
The tape was not removed from the print
cartridge.
Remove the print cartridge, remove the
tape, and return the print cartridge. (See
“Print cartridge” on page 110.)
The print cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the print cartridge. (See “Print
cartridge” on page 110.)
The media you are using does not meet
HP’s specifications (for example, it is too
moist or too rough).
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The original was loaded upside-down.
Load the original with the side to be
scanned facing up in the ADF or down on
the flatbed.
The product cannot print to the edge of
the paper. The printer has minimum
margins on each edge of 4.23 mm (0.167
in.
To get the image to fit into this printable
area, slightly reduce the size of the
image.
If copying, the reduction setting is
incorrect.
Copied images will be clipped if the
image on the original is too close to the
edge of the original.
The paper size setting is incorrect.
Set the correct page size using the
control panel menu.
Parts of the
page around
the edges are
not printing.
The media you are using does not meet
Vertical white
stripes appear. HP’s specifications (for example, it is too
moist or too rough).
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The toner is low.
Gently shake the print cartridge back and
forth to redistribute the toner.
If copying with the ADF, the ADF glass is
dirty.
1. Clean the ADF glass.
2. If the problem persists, replace the
print cartridge.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
fuser assembly.
194 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 19. Solving scanning (copying) image-quality problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Copies or
scanned
images are too
light or too
dark.
The contrast is not set correctly.
1. Adjust the contrast and resolution
settings from the control panel menu or
HP LaserJet Director or HP Document
Manager.
2. Check that the contrast and resolution
settings are correct. See the user guide
for more information.
The original image is very light or very
dark.
Adjust the resolution and contrast
setting(s) from the control panel menu or
toolbox on the HP LaserJet Director or
HP Document Manager.
The scanned image is too light or too
dark because the original was on colored
paper.
If the original was on a colored paper,
including brown recycled paper, the text
might not be clear. Adjust the resolution,
contrast, and brightness settings from
the toolbox on the HP LaserJet Director
or HP Document Manager.
The printer needs to be cleaned.
Clean the printer. (See “Cleaning the
print path” on page 59.)
If copying with the ADF, the ADF glass is
dirty.
Clean the ADF path. (See “Cleaning the
product” on page 57.)
A component is damaged. (For example,
the photosensitive drum inside the print
cartridge is scratched.)
1. Replace the print cartridge if it is
damaged and if maintenance
procedures do not improve print quality.
2. Replace the scanner assembly.
The scanner glass is dirty.
Clean the ADF path and flatbed glass.
(See “Cleaning the product” on page 57.)
There is a problem with the scanner
assembly.
Replace the scanner assembly.
Verticallyaligned black
streaks or
smears appear
on successive
pages.
Scanned
images have
black dots or
streaks.
EN
Errors 195
Table 19. Solving scanning (copying) image-quality problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Scanned text
is not clear.
The contrast, resolution, or brightness
needs to be adjusted before scanning.
1. Adjust the contrast and resolution
settings from the HP LaserJet Director or
HP Document Manager.
3. Check that the contrast and resolution
settings are correct. See the user guide
section for more information.
The original is on colored paper.
If the original is on colored paper,
including brown recycled paper, the text
might not be clear. Try adjusting the
resolution, contrast, and brightness
settings from the toolbox on the HP
LaserJet Director or HP Document
Manager.
There is a problem with the scanner
assembly.
Replace the scanner assembly.
Images are
scanning at a
reduced size.
The HP software settings are set to
reduce the scanned image.
1. Adjust the settings in the HP LaserJet
Director or HP Document Manager.
2. Adjust the Quick Copy settings.
3. Adjust the settings in the HP LaserJet
Copier software.
Large
amounts of
toner are
scattered
around the
characters.
The media resistivity is too high.
1. Use a different media type. Make sure
that the media meets specifications
detailed in the Print Media Guide for the
HP LaserJet family.
2. Turn the stack of media over and put it
back in the tray.
3. Use media that is designed for laser
printers.
196 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Solving paper-feed problems
Use the following table to solve problems related to moving paper or
documents through the product.
If the problem occurs when copying or scanning, see table 21,
“Solving scanner paper-feed problems,” on page 199.
Solving print paper-feed problems
Table 20. Solving print paper-feed problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Pages are
coming out
curled or
wrinkled.
Paper curl is inherent to the laser printing
processes, and occurs when paper is
subjected to heat. Paper curl tends to
relax as the paper cools while resting on
a flat surface.
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
Paper is curled or wrinkled when using
the paper output bin.
Open the straight-through output door on
the back of the product and use this
paper path. Reset the fuser mode to the
default.
Paper is not stored properly.
Whenever possible, store paper in its
sealed ream at room temperature.
The media is too long for the printer
output bin.
Use the long media extension.
The fuser temperature is too high.
Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of
the driver. Make sure that it is set for the
appropriate media.
Print is
misaligned on
the page
(skewed
pages).
EN
The main input tray is overfilled.
Remove some of the media.
The paper guides are not set correctly,
are broken, or are missing.
Be sure to center the paper with the side
media guides. Verify that the guides are
not adjusted too tightly or too loosely
against the paper. Check for broken or
missing guides and replace as
necessary.
The paper’s weight or surface finish does
not meet HP’s specifications.
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
Solving paper-feed problems 197
Table 20. Solving print paper-feed problems (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
The printer
feeds multiple
sheets or jams
frequently
from the main
input tray or
priority input
tray.
Paper guides are not adjusted properly.
Slide the guides against the sides of the
stack in the main input tray or the priority
input tray to center the paper. Make sure
the guides are not adjusted too tightly.
Paper was not removed from the main
input tray before refilling the tray.
Always remove paper from the main
input tray before refilling it.
The main input tray is overfilled.
Remove some of the sheets. The main
input tray can hold up to 250 sheets of
20-lb. (75 g/m2) bond weight paper (less
for heavier paper) or from 20 to 30
envelopes.
The priority input tray is overfilled.
Remove some of the sheets. The priority
input tray can hold up to ten sheets of
20-lb. (75 g/m2) bond weight paper (one
sheet of heavier paper) or one envelope.
The paper was poorly cut by the
manufacturer and is sticking together.
“Break” the ream of paper by curving it
into an upside-down u-shape; this can
effectively decrease multifeeds. Also try
turning the paper around to feed the
opposite end first, or use a different type
of paper.
The paper does not meet HP’s
specifications for print media.
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The output capacity was exceeded in the
paper output bin.
Do not allow more than 125 sheets of
20-lb. (75 g/m2) bond weight paper (less
for heavier paper) to fill the paper output
bin.
The pickup roller is dirty.
Clean the pickup roller. See “Cleaning
the printer pickup roller” on page 61.
The pickup roller is damaged.
Replace the pickup roller. (See
“Replacing the printer pickup roller” on
page 63.)
The separation pad is dirty.
Clean the separation pad. (See
“Cleaning the printer separation pad” on
page 62.)
The separation pad is damaged.
Replace the separation pad. (See
“Replacing the printer separation pad” on
page 65.)
A sensor is not operating properly.
Check the sensors to make sure that
none of them are jammed. If a sensor
cannot be “unjammed,” replace the
sensor.
198 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Solving scanner (copier) paper-feed problems
Table 21. Solving scanner paper-feed problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Long pages
stop feeding
through the
ADF.
The document is too long.
The maximum document length is 381
mm (15 in). If your document is too long,
copy each segment of it and scan the
copies.
The paper delivery sensor is damaged.
Free the paper delivery sensor. If you
cannot free it, replace it.
Scanned items
are crooked.
The media input tray guides are not set
correctly, are broken, or are missing.
Be sure to center the paper with the
media input tray guides. Verify that the
guides are not adjusted too tightly or too
loosely against the paper. Check for
broken or missing guides and replace as
necessary.
The ADF feeds
multiple
sheets or jams
frequently
from the media
input tray.
The media input tray guides are not
adjusted properly.
Remove the document from the media
input tray. Straighten the item, then
reinsert it. Slide the guides against the
sides of the item to center it. Make sure
the guides are not adjusted too tightly.
The media input tray is overfilled.
Remove some of the sheets. The media
input tray can hold up to 50 pages,
depending on the thickness of the pages.
The item was too thick, too slick, or
otherwise did not meet specifications.
Make sure that the media meets
specifications detailed in the Print Media
Guide for the HP LaserJet family.
The ADF pickup roller is dirty.
Clean the ADF pickup roller. (See the
user guide.)
The ADF document feed guide is not
installed properly.
Ensure that both sides of the ADF
document feed guide are snapped in
properly.
The ADF pickup roller is damaged or
worn.
Replace the ADF pickup roller. (See the
user guide).
The ADF separation pad is dirty,
damaged, or worn.
Replace the ADF separation pad. (See
“ADF separation pad” on page 123.)
The sensor is not operating properly.
Check the sensor to make sure it is not
jammed. If a sensor cannot be corrected,
replace the ADF assembly.
There is a problem in the ADF path.
Check the path for obstructions.
Readjust as necessary or replace the
ADF assembly.
EN
Solving paper-feed problems 199
Functional checks
Engine test
The engine test is used to verify that the print engine is functioning
correctly. The formatter is bypassed during an engine test, so the
engine test is useful for isolating printer problems. The engine test
prints horizontal lines down the entire printable area of a page and is
also useful for checking and adjusting registration.
Printing an engine test
The engine test switch is inside the left side door, below the formatter.
To print an engine test, open the left side door and, using a nonconductive probe, depress the engine test switch. A single test page
will print.
CAUTION
Use a non-conductive probe to depress the engine test switch.
Inserting a conductive probe to depress the switch can damage
the product.
Note
The formatter must be connected to the ECU to perform an engine
test. (See callout 1 in figure 86 on page 165.) Otherwise, the printer
does not print.
You must override the print cartridge door interlock (SW 301). (See
“Paper path check” on page 206.)
2
1
Figure 94.
Engine test switch
200 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Half self-test functional check
The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following
stages:
image formation stage (charges the drum and writes a latent
image to the drum with the laser)
development stage (forms a toner image on the drum)
transfer stage (transfers the image to paper)
cleaning stage (removes excess toner from the drum)
fusing stage (applies heat and pressure to make the image on
paper permanent)
To perform a half self-test check
The purpose of the half self-test check is to determine which process
is malfunctioning.
1
Print a self-test page. (See “Troubleshooting tools” on page 209.)
2
Open the print cartridge door after the paper advances halfway
through the printer (about five seconds after the motor begins
rotation). The leading edge of the paper should have advanced
past the print cartridge.
3
Remove the print cartridge.
4
Open the print cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface. If a
dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface,
assume that the first two functions of the electrophotographic
process are functioning (image formation and development).
Troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem.
To perform other checks
If there is no image on the photosensitive drum, perform these
checks:
EN
1
Make sure you removed the entire length of the sealing tape from
the print cartridge before you installed the cartridge.
2
Perform a drum rotation functional check. (See “Drum rotation
functional check” on page 202.)
3
Perform a high-voltage power supply check. (See “High-voltage
power supply check” on page 204.)
Functional checks 201
Drum rotation functional check
The photosensitive drum, located in the print cartridge, must rotate for
the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive
from the main drive assembly.
Note
This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges have been
used.
1
Open the print cartridge door.
2
Remove the print cartridge.
3
Mark the drive gear on the cartridge with a felt-tipped marker.
Note the position of the mark.
4
Install the print cartridge and close the print cartridge door. The
startup sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the
mark.
5
Open the print cartridge door and inspect the gear that was
marked in step 3. Verify that the mark moved.
If the mark did not move, inspect the main drive assembly to make
sure that it is meshing with the print cartridge gears. If the drive gears
appear functional and the drum does not move, replace the print
cartridge.
202 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Heating element check
Paper passes between the heating element and a soft pressure roller
to fuse toner to the paper.
1
Unplug the product for at least ten minutes. Remove the right
cover (page 113) and back cover (page 130).
2
Verify that the thermistor connector is seated into both the
product chassis and the ECU.
3
Unplug the fuser cable connector (callout 1) by pressing and
releasing the tab on the back of the connector. To measure the
continuity of the heating element, measure the resistance
between the two pins at the end of the cable.
Note
Normal resistance is 25 ohms +/- 10 ohms for the 110V product
and 80 ohms +/- 20 ohms for the 220V product.
If no resistance is measured, replace the fuser.
4
Note
Remove the thermistor connector (callout 2), and measure the
resistance between J206 pins one and two and between J206
pins three and four.
Normal resistance between both pairs of pins is 370K ohms +/50K ohms at 20° C (68° F).
5
If no resistance is measured, replace the fuser.
2
1
2
Figure 95.
EN
Locating connectors for the heating element check
Functional checks 203
High-voltage power supply check
The high-voltage power supply PCA provides the necessary voltages
for the electrophotographic processes.
To check the print cartridge connection points
Turn the print cartridge over and visually inspect the three connection
points on the ends of the print cartridge: drum ground (callout 1),
charging (callout 2), and developing roller (callout 3). If they are dirty
or corroded, clean the connection. If they are damaged, replace the
print cartridge.
Note
Use only isopropyl alcohol to clean the connections.
1
2
Figure 96.
Print cartridge high-voltage connection points (right side)
2
3
2
Figure 97.
Print cartridge high-voltage connection points (left side)
204 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
To check the high-voltage connector assembly
The assembly uses three spring-loaded pins to contact the print
cartridge: drum ground (callout 1), charging (callout 2), and
developing roller (callout 3). Verify that the pins are not dirty or
corroded and that the spring-loading action is functional. If the pins
are dirty, clean them using isopropyl alcohol only. If they are
damaged, replace the high-voltage connector assembly.
2
1
Figure 98.
High-voltage connector assembly (right side)
2
2
3
Figure 99.
EN
High-voltage connector assembly (left side)
Functional checks 205
Paper path check
If paper is not being picked up or is not moving through the paper
path, you might want to observe all of the paper motion activities.
Overriding the door interlock (SW301) allows you to observe:
motor rotation
solenoid action
kick plate motion
paper pickup roller motion
drive roller, transfer roller, fuser roller and gear, and delivery roller
motion
To override SW301
2
1
Figure 100.
Overriding SW301
1
Open the left side door and print cartridge door. Disengage the
two print cartridge door arms.
2
Install the print cartridge, which will press SW301.
3
Press down the laser/scanner interlock switch (callout 1) on the
laser/scanner.
4
While SW301 and the laser/scanner interlock are engaged,
perform an engine test or self-test to observe paper motion. (See
procedures elsewhere in this chapter.)
206 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Updating or recovering the firmware code
At product release, all units are manufactured with flash-memorybased formatters allowing the firmware code to be updated in the
event that new firmware is released for the product or recovered in
the event of code corruption or failure. When the product is mature,
formatters are manufactured with permanent ROM, and updating or
recovering the firmware code is not necessary.
Firmware update via flash executable
The configuration page lists the firmware version of the product. On
flash-memory-based products, you can update the firmware code by
downloading the latest flash executable for the product and running
the program according to the readme instructions that come with it. If
the firmware should become corrupted or fail (usually because of an
interruption when attempting to update the firmware), the product will
no longer function. In this case, a firmware recovery DIMM is
available from HP.
Firmware recovery DIMM
A firmware recovery DIMM can be obtained from HP in the rare event
that the firmware in flash memory becomes corrupted. When the
DIMM is installed in the DIMM slot on the formatter and the product is
powered up, the DIMM loads the latest firmware code into the
product.
EN
Updating or recovering the firmware code 207
To use the firmware recovery DIMM
1
Order a firmware recovery DIMM (RDIMM) from HP. Retain the
return mailer.
2
Open the left side door and install the DIMM.
2
1
Figure 101.
Using the firmware recovery DIMM
3
Plug in the product. The recovery DIMM takes a few minutes to
automatically restore both blocks of firmware code. Wait until you
see the message Complete in the display.
4
Unplug or turn off the product and remove the recovery DIMM.
5
Restore power to the product. It should start up normally.
6
Return the recovery DIMM in the provided packaging to HP.
208 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Troubleshooting tools
Internal reports
Use the control panel to print configuration reports and demonstration
pages. The configuration report shows the settings selected from the
control panel. Printing a configuration report is also considered a "self
test" for the printer, although any of the reports can serve this
purpose. A printout of the control panel menu structure is a useful
reference if you alter settings in the menu.
To print a configuration report, demonstration page,
or menu structure
1
Press menu/enter.
2
Use the < or > key to select Reports and then press menu/
enter.
3
Use the < or > key to select either Config Report, Demo
Page, or Menu Structure and then press menu/enter. The
product exits the Menu settings and prints the report.
Printing all fax reports at once
To print all fax reports at once:
1
Press menu/enter.
2
Use the < or > key to select Reports and then press menu/
enter.
3
Use the < or > key to select All Fax Reports and then press
menu/enter. The product exits the Menu settings and prints the
reports.
When you print all reports at once, the following reports are printed:
Fax activity log—recent faxes sent and received, and their
status
Billing log (if enabled)—prints by billing code
Block fax list (if enabled)—fax numbers you have blocked
Configuration report—current control panel settings, including
the following sections:
• System information
• Reports
• Fax settings
EN
Troubleshooting tools 209
• User defaults
• Service
• Page counts
Speed-dial report—one-touch, speed-dial, and group-dial report
T.30 protocol trace
Use a T.30 protocol trace report to troubleshoot fax transmission
issues.
To print a T.30 protocol trace report
1
Press menu/enter.
2
Use the < or > key to select Service and then press menu/
enter.
3
Use the < or > key to select Print T.30 Trace and then press
menu/enter. The product exits the Menu settings and prints the
reports.
Send a fax from the product or receive a fax to the product from
another fax machine. Print a T.30 trace report after the fax prints.
Explanations of some of the report’s column heading follow:
Date and Time identify when the fax begins. Match it with the fax
log of errors.
Type is the type of fax activity: send or receive.
Identification is the phone number to which a fax is sent.
Result explains the status of the fax:
• “OK” means that the fax was successful.
• “Pending” faxes are in memory or are printing.
• For error codes and their meanings, see tables 22 and 23 on
pages 211 through 222.
210 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 22. Fax receive error codes
Error code
Error definition
Solution
200
The fax session has completed without
errors.
None required.
221
User has pressed cancel causing fax
session to be prematurely halted.
Allow the product to receive the fax.
222
The local machine has answered a call
but has been unable to detect the
presence of a calling fax machine.
Typically this is caused by the local fax
machine answering a voice call.
-OrThe remote user canceled the fax
transmission by pressing cancel
immediately prior to, or just as the local
machine answered the call.
-OrThe remote machine automatically
ended the call immediately prior to, or
just as the local machine answered the
call.
-OrThe remote (calling) fax machine
determined there was a feature
incompatibility between the two and
disconnected immediately before
transmitting any further fax tones or T.30
frames. (This is a very rare and nonstandard behavior.)
1
Confirm that the remote caller is a
fax machine and not a voice call.
(Typically we must rely on the
remote user informing the caller that
the fax session failed.)
2
If the remote machine ends the call
just as the local machine starts
reception, reduce the ring count
after which the local machine
answers. Alternatively suggest that
the remote user manually dials to
the local machine and then
manually starts the fax session, by
pressing Start once fax tones have
been heard from the local machine.
3
Confirm the remote user is not
inadvertently attempting to poll
transmit from the local machine,
instead of transmitting to the local
machine.
4
Reconfigure the local fax machine
to use different configuration
settings, toggle the ECM state and/
or select a slower reception speed.
223 (ECM error)
The local machine has been unable to
receive an entire page even after
multiple attempts to re-receive the parts
of the page that contain errors. This is
usually caused by extremely poor line
conditions.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
-OrDisable ECM. Errors may still occur, and
may result in degraded image quality on
the received page. However, the ability
to receive the entire document will be
improved.
224
The local machine has received one or
more pages with excessive errors. This
is usually caused by extremely poor line
conditions. Error correction is not used
during this session so errors are not
corrected. It should be noted that some
non-HP machines may optionally choose
to resend the entire failed pages, but we
will be unable to determine if the
received page corrects problems with a
previously received page.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
EN
Troubleshooting tools 211
Table 22. Fax receive error codes (continued)
Error code
Error definition
Solution
225
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate a remote diagnostic session with
this machine, even though remote
diagnostic access is locally disabled.
Enable the remote diagnostics capability
on the local machine.
226
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate a remote diagnostic session with
this machine, but the remote diagnostic
versions supported by the two machines
are incompatible.
None. Remote diagnostics cannot occur
between machines with incompatible
remote versions.
227
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate a fax session at a speed and
modulation that is not supported by the
local machine.
Reconfigure the local machine to receive
at a slower speed.
228
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate a poll transmission from the local
machine even though the local machine
is not configured for poll transmission.
1
Confirm that polling by the remote
user is desired. It is possible that
the remote user has inadvertently
attempted to poll. If this is the case,
reattempt a normal transmission
from the remote machine.
2
If polling by the remote user was
desired, confirm that the local
machine was correctly configured
for poll transmission.
229
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate a secure poll transmission from
the local machine but has not provided a
valid password.
If the remote user is the desired recipient
for the polled document, confirm that the
remote user has the correct password
and that the local machine is configured
with the same password.
230
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate an operation that requires error
correction but has not selected error
correction for the session.
Enable ECM on both the local machine
and the remote machine.
231
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate a transmission to the local
machine even though the capability to
receive is disabled at the local machine.
Ensure that the local machine is capable
of receiving a document. Check that
paper is correctly loaded, paper is not
jammed within the machine, and any
other system abnormalities have been
cleared.
232
233
234
235 (ECM error)
236 (ECM error)
237
A communication failure has occurred
between the two machines.
-OrThe user at the remote machine may
have pressed cancel.
-OrThe power at the remote machine has
been interrupted, or deliberately turned
off, causing the fax session to be
interrupted.
1
Re-attempt the fax reception at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
If the error persists, and error
correction is in use for the fax
session, disable ECM.
212 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 22. Fax receive error codes (continued)
Error code
Error definition
Solution
238
239 (ECM error)
240 (ECM error)
241 (ECM error)
The sending fax machine sent an
unexpected communication.
None. This is a defect in the remote
sending machine.
242
The remote fax machine is attempting to
receive instead of send. Both machines
have attempted to start a reception at the
same time. It is possible to accidentally
initiate a fax reception after dialing on
many machines, if there is no paper in
the machine or if the paper is not
correctly loaded and cannot be sensed
by the appropriate document sensor.
Ensure that a document is ready and
correctly loaded in the transmitting fax
machine and that the remote machine is
attempting to initiate a transmission and
not a reception.
243
244
The user of the remote machine has
pressed that machine's top key causing
the session to be prematurely
terminated.
-OrThe remote fax machine determined that
there was a feature incompatibility
between the two machines and has
terminated the session. An example
would be when the local machine wanted
to initiate polling, but the remote machine
did not support this mode of operation.
1
Confirm that the remote user is not
inadvertently attempting to poll
transmit from the local machine,
instead of transmitting to the local
machine. This mode of operation
must be specially configured on the
local machine. If poll transmission
from the local machine is the
desired mode of operation confirm
that the local machine has been
configured for this operation.
2
Reconfigure the local fax machine
to use different configuration
settings, toggle the ECM state and/
or select a slower reception speed.
The user of the remote machine has
pressed that machine's Stop key causing
the session to be prematurely
terminated.
1
If the document was large, ask the
remote user to retransmit the
document as two or more smaller
documents.
2
Disable ECM and reattempt the fax
reception.
245
246 (ECM error)
The local machine has been “holding off”
the remote machine during reception of a
large and/or complex document because
of lack of available memory. This hold off
time has exceeded the timeout (typically
60 seconds) used by the remote
machine and it has terminated the
session.
247 - 251
EN
The remote machine appears to be stuck
“on.”
None.
Troubleshooting tools 213
Table 22. Fax receive error codes (continued)
Error code
Error definition
Solution
252
Telephone line conditions were too poor
to receive a fax.
1
Reattempt the fax reception at a
later time when line conditions may
have improved.
2
Configure the machine to start
reception at a lower speed.
3
If the local machine successfully
received several pages of a larger
document, ask the remote user to
transmit the document in several
smaller parts.
253
The remote machine has attempted to
initiate a page transmission using a page
width that is not supported by the local
machine.
Ask the remote user to reconfigure their
fax machine to transmit using a “normal”
(letter/A4) page width.
281
The local machine has not received any
data at the start of a page during nonECM reception although the modem has
not detected a remote disconnect. The
remote machine is probably transmitting
fill bytes instead of data and is either
broken or jammed.
Reattempt the fax reception after first
requesting that the remote user check
his or her machine.
282
The local machine has not received any
data at the start of a page during ECM
reception although the modem has not
detected a remote disconnect. The
remote machine is probably transmitting
sync frames instead of data and is either
broken or jammed.
Reattempt the fax reception after first
requesting that the remote user check
his or her machine.
283
The local machine has detected that
modem carrier has stopped. Either the
line has been disconnected or the
remote machine has aborted the
transmission.
Reattempt the fax reception after first
requesting that the remote user check
his or her machine.
284
The local machine has not received any
data during non-ECM page reception
and a timeout failure has occurred. The
remote machine is probably transmitting
fill bytes instead of data and is either
broken or jammed.
Reattempt the fax reception after first
requesting that the remote user check
his or her machine.
285
The local machine has stopped receiving
any data during an ECM page reception
although the modem has not detected a
remote disconnect. The remote machine
is probably transmitting sync frames
instead of data and is either broken or
jammed.
Reattempt the fax reception after first
requesting that the remote user check
his or her machine
214 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 22. Fax receive error codes (continued)
Error code
Error definition
Solution
286
The remote machine has transmitted
invalid data. The local machine has
received frames with errors during an
ECM reception and requested
retransmission of the failed frames. The
data that is resent does not correspond
to the data that was requested. This is an
implementation error from the remote
machine.
Disable ECM and reattempt the
reception.
290
The remote machine has attempted to
renegotiate the session mode from ECM
to non-ECM between pages. This
operation is not supported, and the
session has been abandoned.
Reattempt the fax reception and split the
document into two portions corresponding to the ECM and non-ECM portions.
Some machines will attempt to use nonECM for photo mode, so this may be
associated with a between page
encoding change to support photo mode.
291
This isn't a communication error, and it is
not expected that this error will occur
under non-development scenarios.
Reception has failed because the local
unit is unable to open a file to receive
data into. May be associated with low
memory, although low memory should
not, by itself, produce the error.
If the error persists, cycle the power on
the unit.
292
The remote machine has attempted to
renegotiate the encoding mode from
non-JPEG to JPEG. This operation is not
supported, and the session has been
abandoned.
Reattempt the fax reception and split the
document into two portions corresponding to the JPEG and non-JPEG portions.
Some machines will attempt to use
JPEG for photo mode, so this may be
associated with a between page
encoding change to support photo mode.
EN
Troubleshooting tools 215
Table 23. Fax send error codes
Error code
Error condition
Solution
300
Fax session has completed without
errors.
None required.
311
The user of the local machine has
pressed the Stop key causing the
session to be prematurely halted before
all pages have been transmitted.
None required.
312
A remote fax device has failed to answer
the call. Specifically fax tones or the fax
handshake from a remote machine has
not been detected. Typically this is
caused by the user calling the wrong
number, the correct number has been
called but the machine has been
configured not to answer, or the remote
machine has temporarily disabled
answering because of a condition such
as lack of paper or a paper jam.
Confirm the remote fax machine is ready
to receive a document and reattempt the
transmission.
313
A busy signal has been detected each
time the local machine has attempted to
call the remote machine.
Reattempt the fax transmission at a later
time when the line is no longer busy.
314
The local machine has attempted to
initiate a remote diagnostic session but
has detected that remote diagnostics are
disabled at the remote machine.
Enable remote diagnostics on the remote
machine.
315
The local machine has attempted to
initiate a remote diagnostic session but
has detected that the remote diagnostic
version supported by the remote
machine is incompatible.
No solution. Remote diagnostics cannot
occur between machines with
incompatible remote versions.
316
The local machine is set up to initiate
document transmission, but it has
detected that the remote machine is not
able to receive a document. This error
should be very rare since normally a
remote machine will not answer if it
cannot receive a document. One of the
few exceptions to this would occur if the
remote machine were configured to poll
transmit a document but were unable to
receive.
Configure the remote machine for
reception. Typically the remote user
configure the remote machine, including
loading paper, clearing jams, and
clearing other system abnormalities.
317
The remote machine cannot support a
fax reception at any speed or modulation
that is supported by the local machine.
None
318
The remote machine cannot support a
fax reception at the page width selected
by the local machine.
None
216 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 23. Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code
Error condition
Solution
319
The local machine has attempted to
initiate a binary file transfer (BFT) but
has detected that the remote machine
does not support this mode of operation.
1
Enable the BFT capability on the
remote machine if it is supported.
2
Retransmit the document as a
normal fax, rather than attempting a
BFT transfer.
320
The local machine is set up to initiate poll
reception with a remote machine, but it
has detected that the remote machine is
not configured to do this. Poll
transmission from a remote machine is
typically configured on a session-bysession basis.
Confirm that the local user really wants
to attempt a poll reception. If not,
reconfigure the local machine for a
normal fax transmission.
-OrConfigure the remote machine for poll
transmission. The remote user must load
a document to transmit and then
configure the machine for polling.
321
There was a communication error with
the receiving fax machine caused by
poor telephone line conditions.
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
322 - 324
Telephone line conditions were too poor
to send a fax.
1
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
If the session fails after transmitting
several pages of a large document,
retransmit the document as several
smaller documents.
325 - 328 (ECM
error)
Telephone line conditions were very
poor.
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
-OrDisable ECM. Errors may still occur, and
may result in a degraded image quality
on the received page. However, the
ability to transmit the entire document will
be improved.
329 - 331
The remote machine has reported that
one or more pages have been received
(non-ECM mode) with excessive errors.
This error does not result in the session
being terminated immediately.
Subsequent page transmission can still
occur and later pages may be received
without error.
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
-OrSelect a lower speed for the initial
transmission speed.
332 - 343
There is a defect in the remote fax
machine (the other machine) and there is
no solution except to send or receive to
or from another fax machine.
EN
Troubleshooting tools 217
Table 23. Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code
Error condition
Solution
344 - 348
349-353 (ECM
error)
354-355
The remote machine has failed to
respond to a fax command from the local
machine because the connection is
interrupted.
-OrThe remote user has pressed the Stop
key while the reception was in progress
-OrUnder rare conditions, incompatibility
between the two machines may cause
the remote machine to simply abandon
the call.
1
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
If the fax session was using error
correction, disable ECM.
356 - 361
362-366 (ECM
error)
The remote user has pressed the Stop
key causing the session to be aborted.
-OrThe remote machine has encountered a
system problem such as no paper or a
paper jam which has inhibited it from
receiving any more pages, and which
has caused it to terminate the session
prematurely.
-OrA feature incompatibility has been
encountered by the remote machine
causing it to terminate the session.
1
Configure the remote machine for
document reception by clearing any
paper jams, loading sufficient
paper, and clearing any other
system errors.
2
Configure the local fax machine to
use different configurations; toggle
the ECM state; select a slower
reception speed.
367 - 372
373-377 (ECM
error)
378-379
The remote machine appears to be stuck
“on.”
None.
380
The remote machine has failed to issue a
valid response to a CTC frame. This
occurs during ECM transmission after
multiple retransmissions of erroneous
data.
None; there is a defect in the remote
machine.
381
The remote machine has failed to
respond to a fax command from the local
machine because the connection is
interrupted.
-OrThe remote user has pressed the Stop
key while the reception was in progress.
1
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable ECM.
The remote fax machine has been
“holding off” the local fax machine from
continuing the ongoing transmission
because of a temporary low memory
condition at the remote machine. If this
“hold off” period exceeds a machine's
specific timeout value, the session will be
terminated.
Resend the document as two or more
separate fax transmissions. Wait several
minutes between the end of one
transmission and the start of the next
transmission.
-OrDisable ECM.
382
218 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 23. Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code
Error condition
Solution
383
The remote machine has failed to
respond to a fax command from the local
machine because the connection is
interrupted.
-OrThe remote user has pressed the Stop
key while the reception was in progress.
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved
-OrDisable ECM.
384
The local machine has attempted a black
JPEG transmission to a machine that
does not support this mode.
Reattempt the fax transmission using a
different mode.
386
The local machine has failed to complete
phase 3 of the initial V.34 handshake
after originating a fax session. This is
usually caused by poor line conditions
although it may be a compatibility issue
with certain machines and/or line
conditions.
1
Reattempt the fax reception at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the transmission using
the V.17 mode.
The local machine has failed to
successfully negotiate the initial V.8
handshake with the remote machine
after originating a fax session. Typically,
this will occur when the remote machine
is not fax-capable or has disabled
reception. It may also be a compatibility
issue with certain machines and/or line
conditions.
1
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the transmission using
the V.17 mode.
The local machine has originated a fax
session and detected a remote fax
machine but has been unable to detect
any T30 frames. If the machine is in V.17
mode it is likely that the connection has
been interrupted. In V.34 mode, it is also
possible for this error to occur because
of compatibility problems with certain
machines and/or line conditions.
1
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the transmission using
the V.17 mode.
The local machine has originated a fax
session and has reattempted V.8
negotiations multiple times without
success.
1
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the transmission using
the V.17 mode.
387
388
389
EN
Troubleshooting tools 219
Table 23. Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code
Error condition
Solution
390
The local machine has originated a fax
session using error correction (either
V.34 or V.17). Transmission of an image
has been abandoned after a timeout
when no data has become ready for
transmission. This is most likely caused
by a low-memory condition, although it
could be caused by other internal
problems that cause generation of data
for transmission to stall.
Reattempt the transmission after making
sure documents stored in memory are
printed, and the unit has paper ready for
printing. If the problem persists,
reinitialize permanent storage.
391
The local machine has originated a fax
session without error correction (not
V.34). Transmission of an image has
been abandoned after a timeout when no
data has become ready for transmission.
This is most likely caused by a low
memory condition although it could be
caused by other internal problems that
cause generation of data for
transmission to stall.
Reattempt the transmission after making
sure documents stored in memory are
printed, and the unit has paper ready for
printing. If the problem persists,
reinitialize permanent storage.
392
The local machine has answered a fax
session and completed the initial V.34
handshake but has been unable to
detect any T30 frames. This failure is
either compatibility problems with certain
machines or is caused by line conditions.
1
Reattempt the fax reception at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the reception using the
V.17 mode.
The local machine has failed to complete
phase 3 of the initial V.34 handshake
after answering a fax session. This is
usually caused by poor line conditions
although it may be a compatibility issue
with certain machines and/or line
conditions.
1
Reattempt the fax reception at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the reception using the
V.17 mode.
The local machine has failed to
successfully negotiate the initial V.8
handshake with the remote machine
after answering a fax session. Typically,
this will occur when the calling machine
is not fax-capable. It may also be a
compatibility issue with certain machines
and/or line conditions.
1
Reattempt the fax reception at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the reception using the
V.17 mode.
An unexpected T.30 frame has been
received between pages during a multipage V.34 reception. This is almost
certainly a compatibility problem with the
remote machine and may be caused by
an error with the implementation of the
remote machine.
1
Reattempt the fax reception. If
transmission errors are not
encountered because line
conditions have improved then this
error will probably be avoided.
2
Disable V.34 on the local machine
and attempt the reception using the
V.17 mode.
393
394
395
220 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 23. Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code
Error condition
Solution
396-409
An error occurred during a V.34
transmission when the local machine
was unable to correctly handshake with
the remote machine and was
consequently unable to transmit a T.30
frame. This occurs when the line was
disconnected or if line conditions
degrade during the session.
Reattempt the fax transmission at a
different time when telephone line
conditions have improved.
410-419
Error occurred during a V.34 reception
when the local machine was unable to
correctly handshake with the remote
machine and was consequently unable
to transmit a T30 frame. This occurs
when the line is disconnected or if line
conditions degrade during the session.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
420
V.34 negotiations have failed from the
originating machine during phase 4.
Phase 4 occurs after V.8 and before the
first T.30 frames are exchanged.
Compatibility problems have been
observed in this area when sending to
non-HP units.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
421
V.34 negotiations have failed from the
originating machine during phase 3.
Phase 3 occurs after V.8, before phase
4, and before the first T.30 frames are
exchanged. Compatibility problems have
been observed in this area when sending
to non-HP units.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
422
V.34 negotiations have failed from the
answering machine during phase 4.
Phase 4 occurs after V.8 and before the
first T.30 frames are exchanged.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
423
V.34 negotiations have failed from the
answering machine during phase 3.
Phase 3 occurs after V.8, before
phase 4, and before the first T.30 frames
are exchanged.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
430
The transmitting machine is unable to
send continuous ones at the end of the
control channel prior to starting the
primary channel. This is a V.34 error.
This error may be associated with line
conditions although it is more likely to be
caused by internal problems with the
modem.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
EN
Troubleshooting tools 221
Table 23. Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code
Error condition
Solution
431
The transmitting machine has not
received a response after aborting a
transmission. Depending upon when the
session is aborted, some remote
machines may not respond. It should be
noted that the local unit always attempts
to abort the session in such a way that
the remote machine is allowed to
respond to the final PPS_EOP.
No action required. The session was
aborted.
440-444
Error occurred during a V.34
transmission after one or more partial
pages (image data) were transmitted
using the primary channel. The
transmitting machine was unable to
restart the control channel in order to
resume the T.30 handshake. This
typically occurs when the receiving
machine prematurely disconnects during
partial page reception, although it is
possible it may also be caused by
compatibility issues.
Reattempt the fax reception at a different
time when telephone line conditions
have improved.
Translating the fax trace report
Print a fax log report (see the user guide for instructions). The fax log
report contains information about the product’s interpretation of the
problem.
Read the time sequences, looking for abnormal activity on the fax
trace report. See table 24, “Fax phase sequence,” on page 223, and
table 25, “Appropriate responses,” on page 224, to separate normal
from abnormal activity. Fax abbreviations appear in table 26 on page
225.
Identify the phase in which the error occurred.
Note
??? is an unidentified command.
Examples of a successfully sent fax and a successfully received fax
appear after the tables.
222 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 24. Fax phase sequence
Sequence Calling station
Called station
Phase A—Call setup sequence
1
Ring signal
2
CNG tone beep, 1100Hz 1 second
3
Transmit CED, 3 seconds, 2100 Hz
4
Transmit NSF
5
Transmit CSI
6
Transmit DIS
7
DIS detected
Phase B—Pre-message procedure (negotiate compatible format/protocol)
8
Transmit TSI
9
Transmit DCS, select mode
10
DCS detected
11
Transmit TCF/training
12
Transmit FSK
13
Training (synchronize signals), check for errors
14
15
Transmit CFR
Detect CFR
Phase C—Message transmission (page/scan transmission)
16
Transmit message (FSK, followed by date)
17
Receive message (SCAN), check for errors
18
Transmit FSK
19
At end of message, send one of the
following:
EOM
EOP
MPS
PRI-Q
PPS-NULL
PPS-MPS
PPS-EOM
PPS-EOP
PPS-PRI-Q
Phase D—Post-message transmission (next page/end of transmission)
20
Detect EOM, EOP, MPS, PRI-Q, PPS-NULL,
PPS-MPS, PPS-EOM, PPS-EOP, or PPS-PRI-Q
21
Transmit MCF response to confirmation signals
of post-message responses
Phase E—Call release (hangup sequence)
21
22
EN
Transmit DCN
Station hangs up
Troubleshooting tools 223
Table 25. Appropriate responses
Commands
Comments
(NSF) (CSI) DIS
Identifying capabilities: from a manual receiver (NSC) (CIG) DTC
or an auto-answer unit
(TSI) DCS
(NSF) (CSI) DIS
(CRP) (TSI) (NSS)
(PWD) (SEP) (CIG) DTC
(PWD) (SUB) (TSI) DCS
(NSC) (CIG) DTC
Mode-setting command: from calling unit
(TSI) DCS
(NSF) (CSI) DIS
(PWD) (SEP) (CIG) DTC
Poll operation
(CRP) (TSI) (NSS)
(TSI) DCS
(TSI) (NSS)
Mode-setting command: from manual
transmitter or automatic receiver
CFR
FTT
(NSC) (CIG) DTC
(PWD (SUB) (TSI) DCS
This command is always followed by phasing/
training.
(NSC) (CIG) DTC
CTC
Mode-setting command: from the transmitter to (CTR)
the receiver
(CRP)
(EOR-NULL)
Indicates the next block transmission from the
transmitter to the receiver
(ERR)
(RNR)
(CRP)
Any one of the following:
(EOR-EOP)
(EOR-EOM)
(EOR-PRI-MPS)
(EOR-PRI-EOP)
(EOR-PRI-EOM)
The receiver
(ERR)
(RNR)
PIN
(CRP)
Any one of the following:
MPS
EOP
EOM
(PRI-MPS)
(PRI-EOP)
(PRI-EOM)
Post-message commands
MCF
RTP
RTN
PIP
PIN
(CRP)
(PPS-NULL)
Post-message command for a partial page
from the transmitter to the receiver
(PPR)
MCF
(RNR)
(CRP)
Any one of the following:
(PPS-MPS)
(PPS-EOP)
(PPS-EOM)
(PPS-PRI-MPS)
(PPS-PRI-EOP)
(PPS-PRI-EOM)
Post-message commands for a complete page (PPR)
from the transmitter to the receiver
MCF
(RNR)
PIP
PIN
(CRP)
(RR)
Ask for the status of the receiver: from the
transmitter to the receiver
(RNR)
(ERR)
MCF
PIP
PIN
(CRP)
DCN
Phase E command
None
224 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
Appropriate responses
EN
Table 26. Fax abbreviations
Abbreviation Function
Signal format (“X”= any #)
CED
Called station identification
2100 Hz
CFR
Confirmation to receive
X010 0001 1850 or 1650 Hz for
3 seconds
CIG
Calling subscriber identification
1000 0010
CNG
Calling tone
1100 Hz for 500 ms
CRP
Command repeat
X101 1000
CSI
Called subscriber identification
0000 0010
CTC
Continue to correct
X100 1000
CTR
Response to continue to correct
X010 0011
DBM
-dBM signal strength detected from sending station
(number is deviation from average value)
Range in -10 to -43 (-43 is a
weak signal; see explanation
below Figure 85, Example of a
successfully received fax)
DCN
Disconnect
X101 1111
DCS
Digital command signal
X100 0001
DIS
Digital identification signal
0000 0001
DTC
Digital transmit command
1000 0001
DOM
End of message
X111 0001 1100 Hz
EOP
End of procedure
X111 0100
EOR
End of retransmission
X111 0011
EQM
Eye quality monitor—a measure of the modem signal
quality, lower numbers indicate better signals
0-99
ERR
Response for end of retransmission
X011 1000
ECD
Facsimile coded date
0110 0000
FCF
Facsimile
FCS
Frame check sequence
FDM
File diagnostics message
FIF
Facsimile information field
FSK
Frequency shift key. Low-speed command identifier
separating commands/scans; precedes command
mode.
FTT
Failure to train. The 1.5 seconds of the Training Check X010 0010
Frame (TCF) indicates line conditions are not good
enough for this modulation.
GC
Group command
1300 Hz for 1.5 to 100 seconds
2100 Hz for 1.5 to 100 seconds
GI
Group identification
1650 or 1850 Hz
HDLC
High-level data link control
LCS
Line conditioning signals
EN
X011 1111
1100 Hz
Troubleshooting tools 225
Table 26. Fax abbreviations (continued)
Abbreviation Function
Signal format (“X”= any #)
MCF
Message confirmation
X011 0001
1650 or 1850 Hz
MSG
Message received high speed data
MPS
Multi-page signal
X111 0010
NSF
Non-standard facilities command
1000 0100
NSF
Non-standard facilities
0000 0100
NSS
Non-standard setup
X100 0100
PID
Procedure interrupt disconnect
X011 0110
PIN
Procedural interrupt negative
X011 0100
PIP
Procedural interrupt positive
X011 0101
PIS
Procedural interrupt signal
462 Hz for 3 seconds
PPS
Partial-page signal
X111 1101
PPS-EOM
Partial-page signal—end of message
X111 1101
PPS-EOP
Partial-page signal—end of procedure
X111 1101
PPS-MPS
Partial-page signal—multi-page signal
X111 1101
PPS-NULL
Partial-page signal—null
X111 1101
PPR
Partial-page request
X011 1101
PRI-EOM
Procedure interrupt—end of message
X111 1001
PRI-EOP
Procedure interrupt—end of procedure
X111 1100
PRI-MPS
Procedure interrupt—multi-page signal
X111 1010
RCP
Return to control for partial page
0110 0001
RNR
Receive not ready
X011 0111
RR
Receive ready
X111 0110
RTC
Return to control mode
Six EOLs
RTN
Retrain negative
X011 0010
RTP
Retrain positive
X011 0011
TCF
Training check
Zeroes for 1 5 5
TSI
Transmitting subscriber identification
X100 0010
PWD
Password (for polling)
1000 0011
PWD
Password (for transmission)
X100 0101
SCAN
Data packets or scan line count
SEP
Selective polling
1000 0101
SUB
Sub-address
X100 0011
V.xx
Protocol version used (Group 3 only)
V.27 = 4800/2400
V.29 = 9600/7200
V.33 = 14400/12000
V.17 = 14400/12000/9600/7200
XID
Exchange identification procedure
???
Unidentified command sequence
226 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 102.
Note
EN
Example of a T.30 trace of a successfully sent fax
Phase A, call establishment, does not show up on a trace report.
Phase C is the phase in which faxed pages are transferred.
Troubleshooting tools 227
Figure 103.
Example of a T.30 trace of a successfully received fax
228 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Service mode functions
Secondary service menu
Use the secondary service menu to perform various tests and print
service reports. Below is a hierarchical diagram of the secondary
service menu:
Main menu
Submenu
Submenu
2ndary Service .............
Service reports............
Continuous Self-Test
Data Store
Extended Keymap
Scanline data ...............
Red-corrected
Blue-corrected
Green-corrected
Red-uncorrected
Blue-uncorrected
Green-uncorrected
To gain access to the secondary service menu
1
Make sure that the control panel display reads Ready.
2
Press menu/enter.
3
Press 2 on the keypad.
Note
You can access the secondary service menu from any other menu
by pressing 2.
4
Use the < and > keys to navigate the secondary service menu.
5
To exit the secondary service menu and remove it from the menu
tree, press cancel to return to the Ready display, then press
cancel again.
To print a list of all the data store parameters
EN
1
From the secondary service menu, use the < and > keys to select
Service reports, and press menu/enter.
2
Use the < and > keys to select Data Store, and press menu/
enter.
Service mode functions 229
Developer’s menu
Use the developer’s menu to adjust fax data store parameters and to
run various tests. Below is a hierarchical diagram of the developer’s
menu:
Main menu
Submenu
Developer’s menu ............
R/W parameter
Submenu
Monitor test ......................
Onhook monitor
Offhook monitor
Eavesdrop monitor
Signal power monitor
LIU test .............................
LIU inputs
LIU ID
Loopback test
Transmit test
To gain access to the developer’s menu:
1
Make sure that the control panel display reads Ready.
2
Press menu/enter.
3
Press the * and # keys on the keypad.
Note
You can access the developer’s menu from any other menu by
pressing the * and # keys on the keypad.
4
Use the < and > keys to navigate the developer’s menu.
5
To exit the developer’s menu and remove it from the menu tree,
press cancel to return to the Ready display, then press cancel
again.
230 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
To adjust a country/region code parameter
Fax data store parameter number 3 is LIU COUNTRY, which is the
country/region code for the fax. Before adjusting the fax data store
parameters, you can print a list of all the parameters from the
secondary service menu (page 229).
Note
Changing the country/region code does not change the language.
1
Use the < and > keys to navigate to R/W PARAMETER and then
press menu/enter.
2
Press >>> to display LIU COUNTRY, then press menu/enter.
3
Use the keypad to input the country/region code (see table 27
below) and then press menu/enter.
Note
As a shortcut, you can press 3 at the R/W PARAMETER menu to
move to directly to parameter 3. However, this shortcut has
restrictions associated with parameters containing the number 2.
(See page 232 for more information about this shortcut.)
CAUTION
Changing country/region code parameters can render the product
illegal or inoperable.
Table 27. Country/region codes
Country/region Country/region code
Country/region
Argentina
16
Malaysia
27
Australia
23
Mexico
13
Austria
34
Netherlands
35
Belgium
45
New Zealand
19
Canada
14
Norway
43
6
Poland
56
Denmark
40
Portugal
50
Finland
46
Russia
64
France
47
Singapore
30
Germany
39
Spain
55
Greece
49
Sweden
41
Hong Kong
29
Switzerland
36
Hungary
62
Taiwan
China
EN
Country/region code
7
Service mode functions 231
Table 27. Country/region codes
Country/region Country/region code Country/region
Country/region code
Ireland
44
Ukraine
63
Israel
21
United Kingdom
31
Italy
51
United States
15
Korea
4
4
Power-cycle the product by unplugging (or turning off) the
product and then plugging back in (or turning on) the product.
To adjust fax data store parameters
CAUTION
When you adjust fax data store parameters, the product does not
alert you to incorrect input values. Changing fax data store
parameters can render the product illegal or inoperable.
Note
Before adjusting the fax data store parameters, you can print a list
of all the parameters from the secondary service menu (page 229).
1
On the developer’s menu, use the < and > keys to navigate to
R/W PARAMETER and then press menu/enter.
2
Use the < and > keys to locate the parameter you want to
change. The control panel display shows the current setting.
3
Enter the new value for the fax data store parameter and then
press menu/enter.
To scroll quickly to a particular data store parameter
When the display says R/W PARAMETER, you can jump directly to
any parameter ID that does not contain a 2 by entering the ID on the
keypad. If you press 2, that will bring up the secondary service menu.
If you want to change a parameter that has a 2 in its ID, enter the ID
of the closest parameter that does not have a 2 and then use the <
and > keys to locate the parameter you want to change. For example,
to move quickly to parameter 152, enter 151 >.
232 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
NVRAM init
NVRAM init sets all stored parameters in NVRAM back to factory
default values or to a default ROM value, depending on the variable,
and performs a system reset.
CAUTION
Performing NVRAM init can cause the product to violate local
telephone regulations. Reset the language and country/region
code after performing NVRAM init.
NVRAM init resets the following:
All menu settings to factory default values, including fax header
and company name
Factory settings such as formatter number, page counts, and
factory paper settings
Fax memory—all faxes in memory are erased
All localization settings, including language and country/region code
To perform NVRAM init
1
Unplug (or turn off) the product from the power source.
2
Press and hold down the * and menu/enter keys.
3
Continue to hold down the keys while you plug back in (or turn
on) the product, through the entire power on sequence.
4
When the control panel display reads Permanent Storage
Init. release the keys.
5
Allow the product to return to Ready before using the product.
PJL software commands
You can use PJL software commands to set the following NVRAM
variables:
Factory printer DEFAULT PAPER, scanner factory default paper size
will be set to the same value automatically.
Factory printer DEFAULT LPARM:PCL SYMSET
Factory DEFAULT OEM bit
Factory DEFAULT PRINTPAGECOUNT
Factory DEFAULT SCANPAGECOUNT
Factory DEFAULT COPYPAGECOUNT
EN
Service mode functions 233
The table below provides a more detailed description of the NVRAM
PJL factory variables and commands and shows possible settings for
each.
NVRAM PJL Variable or Command
DEFAULT PAPER
DEFAULT LPARM :PCL SYM SET
Figure 104.
Possible settings
"LETTER", "LEGAL, "A4",
"EXECUTIVE”, "COM10”,
"MONARCH”, "DL”, "C5”, "B5",
"CUSTOM"
"ROMAN8", "ISOL1", "ISOL2",
"ISOL5", "PC8", "PC8DN", "PC850",
"PC852", "PC8TK", "W INL1",
"WINL2", "W INL5", "DESKTOP",
"PSTEXT", "VNINTL", "VNUS",
"MSPUBL", "MATH8", "PSMATH",
"VNMATH", "PIFONT", "LEGAL",
"ISO4", "ISO6", "ISO11", "ISO15",
"ISO17", "ISO21", "ISO60", "ISO69",
"WIN30"
DEFAULT OEM
“ON”, “OFF”
DEFAULT PRINTPAGECOUNT
0-2147483647
DEFAULT SCANPAGECOUNT
0-2147483647
DEFAULT COPYPAGECOUNT
0-2147483647
CLEARNVRAM
None - Command
NVRAM INIT
None - Command
NVRAM PJL factory variables
To use these commands, you need some method to send PJL
commands to the product, either with a software tool or by copying a
file that contains the commands from the host using a DOS box. For
example, from the DOS prompt:
copy /b filename lpt1
Here is an example of a file that uses one of the commands:
ESC%-12345X@PJL SET SERVICEMODE=HPBOISEID
@PJL ‘command’
@PJL RESET
Here is an example of using the NVRAMINIT command:
ESC%-12345X@PJL SET SERVICEMODE=HPBOISEID
@PJL NVRAMINIT
@PJL RESET
234 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Note
Set SERVICEMODE before trying to set the variable or you will not
get the desired result. Also reset the PJL to be sure the
SERVICEMODE status is cleared.
To create these files, you need a text editor that can insert the ESC
character or is able to copy it from an existing file. If a software tool is
used, simply send the same strings in the same order as given for the
example files.
EN
Service mode functions 235
Repetitive image defect ruler
First occurrence of print defect
Toner/developing cylinder (37.7 mm)
Toner/primary charging roller (37.7 mm)
Transfer roller (45.2 mm)
Heating element (56.5 mm)
Pressure roller (62.8 mm)
Toner/drum (75.4 mm)
Figure 105.
Repetitive image defect ruler
236 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Main wiring
Figure 106.
EN
Main wiring (1 of 2)
Main wiring 237
Figure 107.
Main wiring (2 of 2)
238 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
Locations of connectors
Figure 108.
EN
Locations of printer connectors
Locations of connectors 239
Locations of connectors and switches
Figure 109.
Locations of connectors and switches
Table 28. Switch functions
SW number
Function
Remarks
SW101
Power switch
220-240V only
SW201
Switch for test print
SW301
Switch for detection of
open door
240 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
EN
7
Parts and diagrams
Chapter contents
Ordering parts and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related documentation and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts that wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to use the parts lists and diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner and ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADF rollers and separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numerical parts list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN
242
242
242
242
243
244
245
246
246
248
249
252
252
253
254
254
256
258
260
262
264
266
271
Chapter contents 241
Ordering parts and supplies
Parts
Order replacement parts from the following website:
http://www.hp.com/ssg/parts/direct_order.html
Related documentation and software
Order documentation and software from the websites listed in Table
29:
Table 29. Technical support websites
HP Customer Care Online
Software drivers, support
documentation, and answers to
frequently asked questions
http://www.hp.com/go/support
HP Technical Training
(North America)
Classes and schedules
http://www.hp.com/go/
resellertraining
Parts
Parts information
http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/
welcome.htm
Parts that wear
The parts that wear on the product are listed in Chapter 3,
“Maintenance,” in Table 12 on page 56. Parts are available directly
from Hewlett-Packard at the following numbers:
US: (800) 538-8787
Canada: (800) 387-3154
in Toronto: (416) 671-8383
United Kingdom: 0734-441212
Germany: 0130-3322
Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone
numbers.
242 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Accessories
Table 30. Accessories
Item
Description
Part number
Dual in-line
memory modules
(DIMMs)
8 MB
C7842A
16 MB
C7843A
32 MB
C7845A
64 MB
C7846A
2,500 page cartridge
C7115A
3,500 page cartridge
C7115X
2-meter IEEE-1284 parallel cable
C2950A
3-meter IEEE-1284 parallel cable
C2951A
2-meter USB cable
8121-0539
2-feet USB cable
8121-0549
Power cord, US/Canada
8120-6812
Power cord, Europe
8120-6811
Power cord, Switzerland
8120-6815
Print cartridge
Cables and
interface
accessories
Power cord, UK
8120-6809
Power cord, Danish
8120-6814
Power cord, SA
8120-6813
Power cord, Israel
8120-6800
HP JetDirect print
server
Model 310X
J6038-60001
Power modules
Australia, New Zealand, and Argentina
INPUT: 240 Vac 50 Hz
OUTPUT: 13 VDC @ 300 ma
0950-3172
China
INPUT: 220 Vac 50 Hz
OUTPUT: 13 VDC @ 300 ma
0950-2806
Continental Europe
INPUT: 230 Vac 50 Hz
OUTPUT: 13 VDC @ 300 ma
0950-3170
South Korea
INPUT: 220-240 Vac 50 Hz
OUTPUT: 13 VDC @ 625 ma
9100-5168
(NOTE: If two
parts are listed for
one country or
region, you can
use either part
regardless of the
output rating.)
EN
Ordering parts and supplies 243
Table 30. Accessories (continued)
Power modules
(continued)
Toner cloth
South Africa and India
INPUT: 220-250 Vac 50 Hz
OUTPUT: 13 VDC @ 625 ma
9100-5171
United Kingdom, Singapore, Ireland,
and Hong Kong
INPUT: 220-240 Vac 50 Hz
OUTPUT: 13 VDC @ 300 ma
0950-3171
USA, Canada, Latin America, and Taiwan
INPUT: 110-127 Vac 60 Hz
OUTPUT: 13 VDC @ 300 ma
0950-3169
Ideal for wiping up toner spills
5090-3379
Common hardware
The product has three common fasteners. See Table 31 for a
description of these screw types.
Table 31. Common fasteners
Example
Description
Screw, machine, truss head
Screw, star
Screw, self-tapping
Screw, Torx
244 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Note
Part number RY7-5082-000CN is a screw kit for the printer portion of the
product. To order all the screws for the HP-3300 product, order full
quantities of parts RY7-5082-000CN, 0515-4331, 0515-4330, 0515-4257,
and 0515-2908.
How to use the parts lists and diagrams
The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies in the
product and their component parts. A table (material list) follows each
exploded assembly diagram. Each table lists the reference
designator, the associated part number for the item, and a description
of the part.
Parts that have no reference designator or part number are not fieldreplaceable units and cannot be ordered.
While looking for a part number, pay careful attention to the voltage
listed in the description column to make sure that the part number
selected is for the correct product model.
EN
How to use the parts lists and diagrams 245
Scanner assemblies
Scanner and ADF
1
10
6
4
10
9
5
2
11
12
3
7
3
10
8
10
Figure 110.
Scanner covers and ADF
246 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Part numbers
Table 32. Scanner and ADF
EN
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
C9143-60101
ADF
1
C9124-60117
Flatbed lid
1
2
C9124-60103
Scanner assembly
1
3
C9124-40002
Left scanner cover
1
4
C9124-40003
Right scanner cover
1
5
C9124-40005
ADF glass frame
1
6
C7296-00014
ADF glass
1
7
C9143-60102
ADF input tray
1
8
C9124-60115
Scanner formatter (includes
Scanner FFC: C9124-60116)
1
9
0515-4331
Screws that secure scanner to
printer
4
10
0515-4330
Screws for scanner side panels,
scanner formatter, and ADF glass
frame
7
11
0515-4257
Screw for scanner formatter
1
12
C9124-60116
Scanner flat flexible cable (FFC)
1
Scanner assemblies 247
ADF rollers and separation pad
2
4
3
1
Figure 111.
ADF rollers and separation pad
Part numbers
Table 33. ADF rollers and separation pad
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
C7309-60016
ADF pick roller assembly
1
2
C7309-40077
ADF document feed guide
1
3
C7309-60009
ADF separation pad
1
4
0624-1055
Torx screw
2
248 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Control panel assembly
5
3
1
4
2
6
Figure 112.
Control panel assembly
Part numbers
Table 34. Control panel assembly
EN
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
C9124-40006
Control panel chassis
1
2
C9124-60111
Control panel cable
1
3
C9126-60102
Fax control panel
1
C9709-60102
US copy control panel
1
C9124-60108
Copy control panel
1
4
C9124-60113
Speaker
1
6
0515-4330
Screws for control panel chassis
3
Scanner assemblies 249
Table 34. Control panel assembly
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
5
C9124-40038
English 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40039
Traditional Chinese 3300 copy bezel 1
C9124-40017
Korean 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40018
Simplified Chinese 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40019
Thai 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40020
Greek 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40021
Turkish 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40022
Portuguese 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40023
French 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40024
German 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40025
Spanish 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40026
Dutch 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40027
Norwegian 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40028
Swedish 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40029
Hebrew 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40030
Finnish 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40031
Danish 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40032
Italian 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40033
Russian 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40034
Czech 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40035
Hungarian 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40036
Polish 3300 copy bezel
1
C9124-40037
Arabic 3300 copy bezel
1
C9709-40002
US 3310 copy bezel
1
C9125-40001
English 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40002
Traditional Chinese 3320 copy bezel 1
C9125-40003
Korean 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40004
Simplified Chinese 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40005
Thai 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40006
Greek 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40007
Turkish 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40008
Portuguese 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40009
French 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40010
German 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40011
Spanish 3320 copy bezel
1
250 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 34. Control panel assembly
EN
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
5 (cont.)
C9125-40012
Dutch 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40013
Norwegian 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40014
Swedish 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40015
Hebrew 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40016
Finnish 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40017
Danish 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40018
Italian 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40019
Russian 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40020
Czech 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40021
Hungarian 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40022
Polish 3320 copy bezel
1
C9125-40023
Arabic 3320 copy bezel
1
C9126-40004
English 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40005
Portuguese 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40006
French 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40007
German 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40008
Spanish 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40009
Dutch 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40010
Norwegian 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40011
Swedish 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40012
Danish 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40013
Italian 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40014
Russian 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40015
Hungarian 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40016
Polish 3330 fax bezel
1
C9126-40017
Finnish 3330 fax bezel
1
Scanner assemblies 251
Printer assemblies
Printer covers
4
5
6
7
2
3
1
8
Figure 113.
Printer covers
Part numbers
Table 35. Printer covers
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
RA0-1450-000CN
Cover, front
1
2
RG0-1116-000CN Cover, right side
252 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
1
EN
Table 35. Printer covers
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
3
RG0-1113-000CN Door, left side with hinge
1
4
RG0-1114-000CN Back cover assembly
1
5
RF0-1100-000CN
1
6
RG0-1115-000CN Print cartridge door assembly
1
7
7121-8043
HP Jewel
1
8
RA0-1470-000CN
Left bottom frame support
1
RY7-5082-000CN
Printer screw kit (contains a full set
of screws for the printer portion of
the HP LaserJet 3300mfp series
product)
1
Top cover assembly
Paper tray
1
2
Figure 114.
Paper tray
Part numbers
Table 36. Paper tray
EN
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
RG0-1121-000CN Printer pickup tray assembly
1
2
RG0-1122-000CN Paper pickup cover assembly
1
Printer assemblies 253
Internal assemblies
Internal components (1 of 2)
21
20
18
19
Figure 115.
17
Internal components (1 of 2)
254 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Part numbers
Table 37. Internal components (1 of 2)
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
RA0-1181-000CN
Shutter guide
1
2
RA0-1182-000CN
Shutter lever
1
3
RA0-1169-000CN
Compression spring
1
4
RG9-1486-000CN Laser/scanner assembly
5
RG0-1074-000CN Cable, laser/scanner
1
6
RG0-1020-000CN Pickup gear assembly
1
7
RA0-1452-000CN
Cover, right support
1
8
RF0-1008-000CN
Pickup roller
1
9
RA0-1172-000CN
Gear, 17T
1
10
RG9-1483-000CN Transfer roller
1
11
RG0-1002-000CN Left plate assembly
1
12
RA0-1444-000CN
1
13
RH2-5440-000CN
Cable, laser/scanner flat flexible
1
14
C9158-60001
Formatter-copy
1
C8542-60001
Formatter-fax
15
C9124-00003
Formatter shield
16
0515-2908
Formatter screws
5
17
C9138-60001
LIU-US
1
C9138-60002
LIU-WW
1
C9126-60103
Cable modem FFC
1
19
C9126-40003
LIU cover
1
20
0515-4257
LIU screw
1
21
RA0-1212-000CN
Tension spring
1
18
EN
Cover, left support
1
1
Internal assemblies 255
Internal components (2 of 2)
6
2
5
8
7
4
10
9
3
7
11
Figure 116.
1
Internal components (2 of 2)
256 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Part numbers
Table 38. Internal components (2 of 2)
EN
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
RA0-1451-000CN
Front guide assembly
1
2
RG0-1119-000CN Fan assembly
1
3
RA0-1173-000CN
Lever holder
1
4
RA0-1446-000CN
Fuser plate, left
1
5
RA0-1447-000CN
Fuser plate, right
1
6
RA0-1176-000CN
Gear, 69T
1
7
RA0-1457-000CN
Connecting Link
2
8
RG0-1001-000CN Right plate assembly
1
9
RH7-5315-000CN
Solenoid, DC24V
1
10
RH7-1473-000CN
Motor
1
11
RA0-1197-000CN
Foot, rubber (plate assemblies)
2
Internal assemblies 257
Electrical components
Figure 117.
Electrical components
258 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Part numbers
Table 39. Electrical components
Ref.
EN
Part number
Description
Qty.
1
RA0-1127-000CN
Engine controller case
1
2
RA0-1128-000CN
PCB spacer
6
3
WT2-5694-000CN Clamp, cable
1
5
RG0-1117-000CN Engine controller PCB assembly,
110-127V
1
RG0-1118-000CN Engine controller PCB assembly,
220-240V
1
Internal assemblies 259
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 2)
19
28
10
Figure 118.
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 2)
260 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Part numbers
Table 40. Paper pickup assembly (1 of 2)
Ref.
EN
Part number
Description
Qty.
RG0-1120-000CN Paper pickup assembly
1
10
RA0-1072-000CN
Grounding plate
1
11
RA0-1035-000CN
Torsion spring
1
19
RY7-5081-000CN
Clutch kit
1
23
RG0-1007-000CN Paper pickup shaft assembly
1
25
RG0-1005-000CN Feed roller holder assembly
1
25A
RG0-1072-000CN Paper sensor PCB assembly
1
28
RA0-1200-000CN
1
Torsion spring
Internal assemblies 261
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 2)
8
Figure 119.
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 2)
262 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Part numbers
Table 41. Paper pickup assembly (2 of 2)
EN
Ref.
Part number
Description
Qty.
2
RA0-1003-000CN
Foot, rubber (paper pickup
assembly)
2
22
RG0-1124-000CN Paper lift plate assembly
1
24
RF0-1014-000CN
Separation pad
1
8
RA0-1065-000CN
Arm
2
Internal assemblies 263
Fuser assembly
18
26
Figure 120.
Fuser assembly
264 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Part numbers
Table 42. Fuser assembly
Ref.
EN
Part number
Description
Qty.
RG9-1493-000CN Fuser assembly, 110V
1
RG9-1494-000CN Fuser assembly, 220V
1
2
RF0-1003-000CN
1
4
RG0-1010-000CN Facedown delivery assembly
5
RA0-1088-000CN
Gear, 29T
1
6
RA0-1089-000CN
Gear, 17T (fuser assembly)
1
18
RA0-1104-000CN
Bushing
1
26
RG0-1082-000CN Delivery sensor PCB assembly
Faceup roller
1
1
Internal assemblies 265
Alphabetical parts list
Table 43. Alphabetical parts list
Description
Part number
Ref.
Figure
ADF
C9143-60101
1
110
ADF document feed guide
C7309-40077
2
111
ADF glass
C7296-00014
6
110
ADF glass frame
C9124-40005
5
110
ADF input tray
C9143-60102
7
110
ADF pick roller assembly
C7309-60016
1
111
ADF separation pad
C7309-60009
3
111
Arm
RA0-1065-000CN
8
119
Back cover assembly
RG0-1114-000CN
4
113
Bezel, Arabic 3300 copy
C9124-40037
5
112
Bezel, Arabic 3320 copy
C9125-40023
5
112
Bezel, Czech 3300 copy
C9124-40034
5
112
Bezel, Czech 3320 copy
C9125-40020
5
112
Bezel, Danish 3300 copy
C9124-40031
5
112
Bezel, Danish 3320 copy
C9125-40017
5
112
Bezel, Danish 3330 fax
C9126-40012
5
112
Bezel, Dutch 3300 copy
C9124-40026
5
112
Bezel, Dutch 3320 copy
C9125-40012
5
112
Bezel, Dutch 3330 fax
C9126-40009
5
112
Bezel, English 3300 copy
C9124-40038
5
112
Bezel, English 3320 copy
C9125-40001
5
112
Bezel, English 3330 fax
C9126-40004
5
112
Bezel, Finnish 3300 copy
C9124-40030
5
112
Bezel, Finnish 3320 copy
C9125-40016
5
112
Bezel, Finnish 3330 fax
C9126-40017
5
112
Bezel, French 3300 copy
C9124-40023
5
112
Bezel, French 3320 copy
C9125-40009
5
112
Bezel, French 3330 fax
C9126-40006
5
112
Bezel, German 3300 copy
C9124-40024
5
112
Bezel, German 3320 copy
C9125-40010
5
112
Bezel, German 3330 fax
C9126-40007
5
112
266 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 43. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Ref.
Figure
Bezel, Greek 3300 copy
C9124-40020
5
112
Bezel, Greek 3320 copy
C9125-40006
5
112
Bezel, Hebrew 3300 copy
C9124-40029
5
112
Bezel, Hebrew 3320 copy
C9125-40015
5
112
Bezel, Hungarian 3300 copy
C9124-40035
5
112
Bezel, Hungarian 3320 copy
C9125-40021
5
112
Bezel, Hungarian 3330 fax
C9126-40015
5
112
Bezel, Italian 3300 copy
C9124-40032
5
112
Bezel, Italian 3320 copy
C9125-40018
5
112
Bezel, Italian 3330 fax
C9126-40013
5
112
Bezel, Korean 3300 copy
C9124-40017
5
112
Bezel, Korean 3320 copy
C9125-40003
5
112
Bezel, Norwegian 3300 copy
C9124-40027
5
112
Bezel, Norwegian 3320 copy
C9125-40013
5
112
Bezel, Norwegian 3330 fax
C9126-40010
5
112
Bezel, Polish 3300 copy
C9124-40036
5
112
Bezel, Polish 3320 copy
C9125-40022
5
112
Bezel, Polish 3330 fax
C9126-40016
5
112
Bezel, Portuguese 3300 copy
C9124-40022
5
112
Bezel, Portuguese 3320 copy
C9125-40008
5
112
Bezel, Portuguese 3330 fax
C9126-40005
5
112
Bezel, Russian 3300 copy
C9124-40033
5
112
Bezel, Russian 3320 copy
C9125-40019
5
112
Bezel, Russian 3330 fax
C9126-40014
5
112
Bezel, Simplified Chinese 3300 copy
C9124-40018
5
112
Bezel, Simplified Chinese 3320 copy
C9125-40004
5
112
Bezel, Spanish 3300 copy
C9124-40025
5
112
Bezel, Spanish 3320 copy
C9125-40011
5
112
Bezel, Spanish 3330 fax
C9126-40008
5
112
Bezel, Swedish 3300 copy
C9124-40028
5
112
Bezel, Swedish 3320 copy
C9125-40014
5
112
Bezel, Swedish 3330 fax
C9126-40011
5
112
Bezel, Thai 3300 copy
C9124-40019
5
112
Bezel, Thai 3320 copy
C9125-40005
5
112
Bezel, Traditional Chinese 3300 copy
C9124-40039
5
112
EN
Alphabetical parts list 267
Table 43. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Ref.
Figure
Bezel, Traditional Chinese 3320 copy
C9125-40002
5
112
Bezel, Turkish 3300 copy
C9124-40021
5
112
Bezel, Turkish 3320 copy
C9125-40007
5
112
Bezel, US 3310 copy
C9709-40002
5
112
Bushing
RA0-1104-000CN
18
120
Cable modem FFC
C9126-60103
18
115
Cable, laser/scanner
RG0-1074-000CN
5
115
Cable, laser/scanner flat flexible
RH2-5440-000CN
13
115
Clamp, cable
WT2-5694-000CN
3
117
Clutch kit
RY7-5081-000CN
19
118
Compression spring
RA0-1169-000CN
3
115
Connecting Link
RA0-1457-000CN
7
116
Control panel cable
C9124-60111
2
112
Control panel chassis
C9124-40006
1
112
Copy control panel
C9124-60108
3
112
Cover, front
RA0-1450-000CN
1
113
Cover, left support
RA0-1444-000CN
12
115
Cover, right side
RG0-1116-000CN
2
113
Cover, right support
RA0-1452-000CN
7
115
Delivery sensor PCB assembly
RG0-1082-000CN
26
120
Door, left side with hinge
RG0-1113-000CN
3
113
Engine controller case
RA0-1127-000CN
1
117
Engine controller PCB assembly,
110-127V
RG0-1117-000CN
5
117
Engine controller PCB assembly,
220-240V
RG0-1118-000CN
5
117
Facedown delivery assembly
RG0-1010-000CN
4
120
Faceup roller
RF0-1003-000CN
2
120
Fan assembly
RG0-1119-000CN
2
116
Fax control panel
C9126-60102
3
112
Feed roller holder assembly
RG0-1005-000CN
25
118
Flatbed lid
C9124-60117
1
110
Foot, rubber (paper pickup assembly)
RA0-1003-000CN
2
119
Foot, rubber (plate assemblies)
RA0-1197-000CN
11
116
Formatter shield
C9124-00003
15
115
Formatter-copy
C9158-60001
14
115
268 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 43. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Ref.
Figure
Formatter-fax
C8542-60001
14
115
Front guide assembly
RA0-1451-000CN
1
116
Fuser assembly, 110V
RG9-1493-000CN
120
Fuser assembly, 220V
RG9-1494-000CN
120
Fuser plate, left
RA0-1446-000CN
4
116
Fuser plate, right
RA0-1447-000CN
5
116
Gear, 17T
RA0-1172-000CN
9
115
Gear, 17T (fuser assembly)
RA0-1089-000CN
6
120
Gear, 29T
RA0-1088-000CN
5
120
Gear, 69T
RA0-1176-000CN
6
116
Grounding plate
RA0-1072-000CN
10
118
HP Jewel
7121-8043
7
113
Laser/scanner assembly
RG9-1486-000CN
4
115
Left bottom frame support
RA0-1470-000CN
8
113
Left plate assembly
RG0-1002-000CN
11
115
Left scanner cover
C9124-40002
3
110
Lever holder
RA0-1173-000CN
3
116
LIU cover
C9126-40003
19
115
LIU screw
0515-4257
20
115
LIU-US
C9138-60001
17
115
LIU-WW
C9138-60002
17
115
Motor
RH7-1473-000CN
10
116
Paper lift plate assembly
RG0-1124-000CN
22
Paper pickup assembly
RG0-1120-000CN
Paper pickup cover assembly
RG0-1122-000CN
2
114
Paper pickup shaft assembly
RG0-1007-000CN
23
118
Paper sensor PCB assembly
RG0-1072-000CN
25A
118
PCB spacer
RA0-1128-000CN
2
117
Pickup gear assembly
RG0-1020-000CN
6
115
Pickup roller
RF0-1008-000CN
8
115
Print cartridge door assembly
RG0-1115-000CN
6
113
Printer pickup tray assembly
RG0-1121-000CN
1
114
Printer screw kit (contains a full set of screws
for the printer portion of the HP LaserJet
3300mfp series product)
RY7-5082-000CN
Right plate assembly
RG0-1001-000CN
EN
119
118
113
8
116
Alphabetical parts list 269
Table 43. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Ref.
Figure
Right scanner cover
C9124-40003
4
110
Scanner assembly
C9124-60103
2
110
Scanner flat flexible cable (FFC)
C9124-60116
12
110
Scanner formatter (includes Scanner FFC:
C9124-60116)
C9124-60115
8
110
Screw: scanner formatter
0515-4257
11
110
Screws: control panel chassis
0515-4330
6
112
Screws: formatter
0515-2908
16
115
Screws: scanner side panels, scanner
formatter, and ADF glass frame
0515-4330
10
110
Screws: scanner to printer
0515-4331
9
110
Separation pad
RF0-1014-000CN
24
119
Shutter guide
RA0-1181-000CN
1
115
Shutter lever
RA0-1182-000CN
2
115
Solenoid, DC24V
RH7-5315-000CN
9
116
Speaker
C9124-60113
4
112
Tension spring
RA0-1212-000CN
21
115
Top cover assembly
RF0-1100-000CN
5
113
Torsion spring
RA0-1035-000CN
11
118
Torsion spring
RA0-1200-000CN
28
118
Torx screw
0624-1055
4
111
Transfer roller
RG9-1483-000CN
10
115
US copy control panel
C9709-60102
3
112
270 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Numerical parts list
Table 44. Numerical parts list
Part number
Description
Ref.
Figure
0515-4331
Screws that secure scanner to printer
9
110
0515-2908
Formatter screws
16
115
0515-4330
Screws for scanner side panels, scanner
formatter, and ADF glass frame
10
110
0515-4257
Screw for scanner formatter
11
110
0515-4330
Screws for control panel chassis
6
112
0515-4257
LIU screw
20
115
0624-1055
Torx screw
4
111
7121-8043
HP Jewel
7
113
C7296-00014
ADF glass
6
110
C7309-40077
ADF document feed guide
2
111
C7309-60009
ADF separation pad
3
111
C7309-60016
ADF pick roller assembly
1
111
C8542-60001
Formatter-fax
14
115
C9124-00003
Formatter shield
15
115
C9124-40002
Left scanner cover
3
110
C9124-40003
Right scanner cover
4
110
C9124-40005
ADF glass frame
5
110
C9124-40006
Control panel chassis
1
112
C9124-40017
Korean 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40018
Simplified Chinese 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40019
Thai 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40020
Greek 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40021
Turkish 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40022
Portuguese 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40023
French 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40024
German 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40025
Spanish 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40026
Dutch 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40027
Norwegian 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40028
Swedish 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40029
Hebrew 3300 copy bezel
5
112
EN
Numerical parts list 271
Table 44. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Ref.
Figure
C9124-40030
Finnish 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40031
Danish 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40032
Italian 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40033
Russian 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40034
Czech 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40035
Hungarian 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40036
Polish 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40037
Arabic 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40038
English 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-40039
Traditional Chinese 3300 copy bezel
5
112
C9124-60103
Scanner assembly
2
110
C9124-60108
Copy control panel
3
112
C9124-60111
Control panel cable
2
112
C9124-60113
Speaker
4
112
C9124-60115
Scanner formatter (includes Scanner FFC:
C9124-60116)
8
110
C9124-60116
Scanner flat flexible cable (FFC)
12
110
C9124-60117
Flatbed lid
1
110
C9125-40001
English 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40002
Traditional Chinese 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40003
Korean 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40004
Simplified Chinese 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40005
Thai 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40006
Greek 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40007
Turkish 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40008
Portuguese 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40009
French 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40010
German 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40011
Spanish 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40012
Dutch 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40013
Norwegian 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40014
Swedish 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40015
Hebrew 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40016
Finnish 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40017
Danish 3320 copy bezel
5
112
272 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 44. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Ref.
Figure
C9125-40018
Italian 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40019
Russian 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40020
Czech 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40021
Hungarian 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40022
Polish 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9125-40023
Arabic 3320 copy bezel
5
112
C9126-40003
LIU cover
19
115
C9126-40004
English 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40005
Portuguese 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40006
French 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40007
German 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40008
Spanish 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40009
Dutch 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40010
Norwegian 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40011
Swedish 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40012
Danish 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40013
Italian 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40014
Russian 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40015
Hungarian 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40016
Polish 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-40017
Finnish 3330 fax bezel
5
112
C9126-60102
Fax control panel
3
112
C9126-60103
Cable modem FFC
18
115
C9138-60001
LIU-US
17
115
C9138-60002
LIU-WW
17
115
C9143-60101
ADF
1
110
C9143-60102
ADF input tray
7
110
C9158-60001
Formatter-copy
14
115
C9709-40002
US 3310 copy bezel
5
112
C9709-60102
US copy control panel
3
112
RA0-1003-000CN
Foot, rubber (paper pickup assembly)
2
119
RA0-1035-000CN
Torsion spring
11
118
RA0-1065-000CN
Arm
8
119
RA0-1072-000CN
Grounding plate
10
118
EN
Numerical parts list 273
Table 44. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Ref.
Figure
RA0-1088-000CN
Gear, 29T
5
120
RA0-1089-000CN
Gear, 17T (fuser assembly)
6
120
RA0-1104-000CN
Bushing
18
120
RA0-1127-000CN
Engine controller case
1
117
RA0-1128-000CN
PCB spacer
2
117
RA0-1169-000CN
Compression spring
3
115
RA0-1172-000CN
Gear, 17T
9
115
RA0-1173-000CN
Lever holder
3
116
RA0-1176-000CN
Gear, 69T
6
116
RA0-1181-000CN
Shutter guide
1
115
RA0-1182-000CN
Shutter lever
2
115
RA0-1197-000CN
Foot, rubber (plate assemblies)
11
116
RA0-1200-000CN
Torsion spring
28
118
RA0-1212-000CN
Tension spring
21
115
RA0-1444-000CN
Cover, left support
12
115
RA0-1446-000CN
Fuser plate, left
4
116
RA0-1447-000CN
Fuser plate, right
5
116
RA0-1450-000CN
Cover, front
1
113
RA0-1451-000CN
Front guide assembly
1
116
RA0-1452-000CN
Cover, right support
7
115
RA0-1457-000CN
Connecting Link
7
116
RA0-1470-000CN
Left bottom frame support
8
113
RF0-1003-000CN
Faceup roller
2
120
RF0-1008-000CN
Pickup roller
8
115
RF0-1014-000CN
Separation pad
24
119
RG0-1001-000CN
Right plate assembly
8
116
RG0-1002-000CN
Left plate assembly
11
115
RG0-1005-000CN
Feed roller holder assembly
25
118
RG0-1007-000CN
Paper pickup shaft assembly
23
118
RG0-1010-000CN
Facedown delivery assembly
4
120
RG0-1020-000CN
Pickup gear assembly
6
115
RG0-1072-000CN
Paper sensor PCB assembly
25A
118
RG0-1074-000CN
Cable, laser/scanner
5
115
RG0-1082-000CN
Delivery sensor PCB assembly
26
120
RF0-1100-000CN
Top cover assembly
5
113
274 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 44. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Ref.
Figure
RG0-1113-000CN
Door, left side with hinge
3
113
RG0-1114-000CN
Back cover assembly
4
113
RG0-1115-000CN
Print cartridge door assembly
6
113
RG0-1116-000CN
Cover, right side
2
113
RG0-1117-000CN
Engine controller PCB assembly,
110-127V
5
117
RG0-1118-000CN
Engine controller PCB assembly,
220-240V
5
117
RG0-1119-000CN
Fan assembly
2
116
RG0-1120-000CN
Paper pickup assembly
RG0-1121-000CN
Printer pickup tray assembly
1
118
114
RG0-1122-000CN
Paper pickup cover assembly
2
114
RG0-1124-000CN
Paper lift plate assembly
22
119
RG9-1483-000CN
Transfer roller
10
115
RG9-1486-000CN
Laser/scanner assembly
4
115
RG9-1493-000CN
Fuser assembly, 110V
120
RG9-1494-000CN
Fuser assembly, 220V
120
RH2-5440-000CN
Cable, laser/scanner flat flexible
13
115
RH7-1473-000CN
Motor
10
116
RH7-5315-000CN
Solenoid, DC24V
9
116
RY7-5081-000CN
Clutch kit
19
118
RY7-5082-000CN
Printer screw kit (contains a full set of screws
for the printer portion of the HP LaserJet
3300mfp series product)
WT2-5694-000CN
Clamp, cable
EN
113
3
117
Numerical parts list 275
276 Chapter 7 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Index
Numerics
B
69T gear, removing 144
back cover, removing 130
background, gray 190
base memory 18
beam detect (BD) signal 92
bidirectional communications 76, 79
bidirectional ECP 78
billing log 209
bin 16
bin, output
capacity 18
printing to 54
bits per pixel (bpp), maximum 18
black dots, troubleshooting
printed pages 189, 193
scanned images 195
black streaks, troubleshooting 195
blinking lights 178
block diagram
printer 84
block diagrams
image formation 91
product functions 84
block fax list 209
boot process 77
bpp (bits per pixel), maximum 18
breaking paper reams 198
buffer memory 79
buttons
alphanumeric 33
control panel 31– 34
bypassing formatter 200
A
abbreviations, fax 225
AC bias 92
AC power distribution 88
accessories, ordering 243
adding paper 50
ADF 18
diagrams and part numbers 246
features 16
life expectancy 56
pickup roller assembly, changing 69, 120
specifications 50
ADF assemblies 119
ADF paper jams 83
ADF paper pickup assembly
diagrams and part numbers 248
ADF pick roller assembly
life expectancy 56
ADF pickup assembly
diagrams and part numbers 248
ADF separation pad
diagrams and part numbers 248
life expectancy 56
ADF, copier, scanner
feeding problems, troubleshooting 199
adhesive labels, printing 50
adjusting
fax data store parameters 230
alcohol, cleaning with 57
high-voltage connection points 204, 205
pickup roller 61
printer separation pad 62
alignment
specifications 21
troubleshooting 192, 197
alphabetical list, part numbers 266
alphanumeric buttons 33
appropriate responses, fax 224
arrays, copier/scanner optical system 80
assemblies, internal 254
automatic document feeder, ADF
capacity 18
automatic document feeder, copier, scanner
feeding problems, troubleshooting 199
EN
C
cables
ECU 166
interface, ordering 243
cancel control 34
capacity
output bin 18
card stock
specifications 48
cards
printing 50
cartridge area, cleaning 60
cartridge door
locating 17
removing 133
Index 277
cartridges
checking 187, 204
drum rotation check 202
extending life of 78
high-capacity 18
life expectancies 56
operations 91, 92
part numbers 243
recycling 25
refilled 25
removing 110
central processing unit (CPU), formatter 76
characters, misprinted 189, 192
Charge Coupled Device (CCD)
operations 80
charging roller
operations 92
power supply 89
checklists
preservice 110
toner cartridge inspection 187
troubleshooting 174
checks
drum rotation 202
engine 200
half-self-test 201
heating element 203
high-voltage power supply 204
paper path 206
circuit capacity specifications 20
circuitry, ECU power system 88
classes, HP Technical Training 242
cleaning
glass 57
high-voltage connection points 204, 205
lid backing 58
media guides 190
pickup roller 61
print path 59
printer separation pad 62
toner cartridge area 60
cleaning stage, image formation process 93
cleaning the product 57
clipped pages, troubleshooting 188, 194
cloth, toner 244
CO 100
Coldfire processor 76
color, scanning specifications 20
colored paper, troubleshooting 195
commands, PJL 233
common settings menu 37
communication operations 76, 79
complex pages, printing 79
components, diagrams and part numbers
electrical 258
internal 254
278
Index
conditioning stage, image formation process 92
configuration report, printing 209
connection points
high-voltage power supply 205
toner cartridge 204
connectors, locations 239
consumables
ordering 242
consumption, power 20
contact image sensor
troubleshooting 195
continuous copy mode, power consumption 20
continuous self-test 229
contrast, troubleshooting 195
control panel
error messages 38
menu structure 35
reports, printing 209
troubleshooting 175
using 35
control panel assembly
diagrams and part numbers 249
control panel bezel, replacing 71
control panel components
alphanumeric buttons 33
copy, scan, and start controls 34
fax controls 31
menu, status, and cancel controls 34
control panel, printer
light messages 178
locating 16
controller PCA. See ECU
copier
operations 80
copier/scanner
feeding problems, troubleshooting 199
operations 76, 80
removing 113
specifications 20
copy setup menu 36
copy speed 20
copying
troubleshooting 176
country/region of origin, identifying 22
coverage, printer 25
covers, removing
back 130
front 133
printer top 132
CPU, formatter 76
crooked pages, troubleshooting 192, 197
crooked scans, troubleshooting 199
curl, troubleshooting 192, 197
Customer Care Online 242
custom-sized media, loading 50
cut-off edges 188, 194
EN
D
dark copies or scans, troubleshooting 195
data communication operations 76, 79
date menu 36
DC bias 92
DC Controller PCA. See ECU
DC power distribution 88
delay jams 96
delivery-delay jams 96
delivery roller, observing 206
delivery sensor, paper (PS401)
feeding operations 94
jam detection operations 96
delivery-stationary jams 96
demonstration report, printing 209
density
operations 89
troubleshooting 189
developer’s menu 230
developing roller 89
developing stage, image formation process 92
dimensions, product 19, 30
DIMM recovery
firmware 207
DIMMs
part numbers 243
slots 18
document feeder, ADF
capacity 18
documentation
ordering 242
doors
print cartridge 17, 133
DOS, PJL commands 234
dots per inch, maximum 18
dots, troubleshooting
printed pages 189, 193
scanned images 195
dpi, maximum 18
draft mode 78
DRAM, formatter 76
drive roller, observing 206
drivers, ordering 242
dropouts, troubleshooting 189, 192
drum
inspecting 187
operations 91, 92, 93
rotation functional check 202
troubleshooting 189
drum cleaning stage, image formation process 93
duty cycle 18
dynamic random access memory (DRAM), formatter
76
ECP (Extended Capabilities Port) interface 76
ECU
cables 166
electrical components 259
functions 85
jam detection operations 96
laser/scanner operations 87
loads 86
paper feeding operations 94
power system 88
removing 164
ECU (Engine Control Unit)
troubleshooting 175
edges, not printing 188, 194
electrical components, diagrams and part numbers
258
electrical specifications 20
electrophotographic processes
operations 91, 92
testing 201
electrostatic discharge (ESD), precautions for 109
element, heating
check 203
operations 93
Engine Control Unit (ECU)
troubleshooting 175
engine control unit. See ECU
engine test
performing 200
Enhanced I/O 79
envelopes
loading 50
specifications for 47
environmental specifications 19, 30
error messages 38, 178
ESD (electrostatic discharge), precautions for 109
European Union regulatory information 28
exit rollers, fuser assembly 94
exit sensor, paper. See delivery sensor, paper
(PS401)
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) interface 76
extended warranty 24
F
facedown delivery assembly, removing 148
faceup roller, removing 149
fan assembly
removing 153
fasteners, types of 244
E
EconoMode 78
EN
Index 279
fax
abbreviations 225
appropriate responses 224
billing (metering) tone filters 105
data path 102
downstream current detection 103
hook state 103
hook switch control 104
line current control 104
page storage in flash 105
phase sequence 223
ring detect 104
safety isolation 101
safety protection circuitry 102
Fax (LIU)
functions and operation 100
fax activity report 209
fax coding schemes 21
fax compatibility 21
fax data store parameters 230
fax functions menu 36
fax setup menu 37
fax subsystem 100
fax trace report 210
faxes
receiving 32
faxing
controls 31
margins 21
one recipient 31
resolution 21
sending 31–??
speed 21
T.30 protocol trace report 210
features
firmware 19
hardware 16
feed assembly drive rollers 94
feed assembly, removing 168
feed system, paper 94
feeding problems, troubleshooting
copier/scanner 199
frequent 63
printer 197
field replaceable units (FRUs)
procedures for replacing 109
film, transparency
cleaning print path with 59
loading 50
firmware code 77
recovering or updating 207
firmware features 19
first page out 18
flash executable 207
flash executable update of firmware 207
flash memory 77, 106
280
Index
flashing lights 178
Flatbed
specifications 51
flowchart, troubleshooting 174
focusing lenses, operations 92
fonts, included 19
form sensor, ADF
jam detection, ADF
ADF jam detection 83
formatter
bypassing 200
copier/scanner operations 80
features 18
in the fax subsystem 101
operations 76
removing 142
front cover assembly, removing 133
front guide assembly, removing 137
FRUs (field replaceable units)
procedures for replacing 109
fuser assembly
diagrams and part numbers 264
exit rollers 94
heating element check 203
life expectancy 56
operations 93
removing 144
temperature, adjusting 190, 191
troubleshooting 189
fuser roller, observing 206
fuses 164
fuses, overcurrent protection (F101, F102) 89
fusing stage, image formation process 93
G
gear, 69T 144
gray background, troubleshooting 190
group-dial report 210
guide assembly, removing 137
guides
cleaning 190
locating 17
troubleshooting 199
H
half-self-test functional check 201
hardware features 16
hardware maintenance agreements 24
headers, fax
menu 36
heating element
check 203
operations 93
height, product 19, 30
high-capacity print cartridges 18
EN
high-voltage power supply
connector assembly, checking 205
operations 89
testing 204
HP Customer Care Online 242
HP JetDirect print servers, ordering 243
HP SupportPack 24
HP Technical Training 242
humidity
specifications 19
troubleshooting 190, 192
I
I/O, Enhanced 79
idle mode, power consumption 20
image density
troubleshooting 189
voltage operations 89
image formation process
operations 91, 92
testing 201
image quality, troubleshooting
copies and scans 194
printed pages 188
repetitive image defect ruler 236
image sensor
troubleshooting 195
indicator lights, printer control panel
error messages 178
initializing 233
input trays. See main input tray; priority input tray
inserting media 49
interface accessories, ordering 243
internal components, diagrams and part numbers
254
INTR (Initial Rotation Period) 98
isolated job settings 79
isopropyl alcohol, cleaning with
high-voltage connection points 204, 205
pickup roller 61
printer separation pad 62
J
jams
ADF 199
copier/scanner 199
detection operations 96
paper input trays 198
JetDirect print servers, ordering 243
K
keys, numeric
see dialing
keys. See buttons
kick plate motion, observing 206
EN
L
label, model and serial number 22
labels
specifications for 47
labels, printing 50
languages, printer 79
laser/scanner assembly
cautions for 109
diagrams and part numbers 255, 269, 275
operations 87
latent electrostatic image 92
leading edge
detection operations 94, 96
ADF 83
LEDs, printer control panel
error messages 178
left and right support covers
removing 139
left plate assembly, removing 162
length, product 19, 30
lenses, operations 92
letterhead, loading 50
life expectancies
extending toner cartridge 78
high-capacity print cartridges 18
recycling used print cartridges 25
lift plate
diagrams and part numbers 263, 269, 275
operations 94
light copies or scans, troubleshooting 195
lights, printer control panel
error messages 178
lines, troubleshooting
copies or scans 193, 194, 195
printed pages 189
lists, part numbers
alphabetical 266
numerical 271
LIU 76
safety isolation circuitry 101
safety protection 102
LIU functions and operation 100
LIU in the fax subsystem 101
LIU, locating 17
loading
originals 51– 53
loading media 49
loads, ECU 86
long pages, copying or scanning 199
loose toner, troubleshooting 191
lower metal shield, pickup assembly 156
LPT ports, troubleshooting 177
LSTR (Last Rotation Period) 98
M
machine screws 244
Index 281
main input tray
feeding operations 94
feeding problems, troubleshooting 198
loading 49
locating 17
main wiring diagrams 237
maintenance agreements 24
manual feed tray. See priority input tray
manuals
ordering 242
margins
faxing 21
margins, minimum 188, 194
media
common problems 46
guidelines 46
loading 49
sizes 45
specifications 45
media guides
cleaning 190
locating 17
troubleshooting 199
memory
base 18
buffer 79
formatter 76
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 19, 78
menu
developer’s 230
secondary service 229
menu control 34
menu structure
printing 35
using 35
menu structure report, printing 209
messages, error 38, 178
metal shields, pickup assembly 156
mirror operations 92
misalignment
specifications 21
troubleshooting 192, 197
misfeeds, frequent. See feeding problems,
troubleshooting; jams
model number 22
modem speed 21
motor
operations 87
removing 150
rotation, observing 206
multifeeds
See also feeding problems, troubleshooting; jams
copier/scanner 199
printer input trays 65, 198
282
Index
N
Non-Volatile RAM. See NVRAM
numbers, part
alphabetical list 266
numerical list 271
numbers, telephone 242
NVRAM 78
operations 76
NVRAM init 233
NVRAM variables 233
O
one-touch report 210
Online Customer Care, HP 242
operating environment, specifications 19, 30
optical system 80
optical system, copier/scanner
troubleshooting 195
order of
operations 98
printed pages 54
removing parts 111
troubleshooting steps 174
ordering parts and supplies 242
output
locating 16
output bin
capacity 18
printing to 54
output path
cleaning 59
operations 94
output rollers, removing 148, 149
overcurrent/overvoltage protection 89
overhead transparencies
cleaning print path with 59
loading 50
P
Page Protect 79
pages per minute 19
pages per month 18
pan
ECU 164
paper
breaking reams 198
common problems 46
guidelines 46
loading 49
specifications 45
storing 197
paper delivery sensor (PS401)
feeding operations 94
jam detection operations 96
paper-feed assembly, removing 168
EN
paper feed problems, troubleshooting
copier/scanner 199
printer 197
paper feed system 94
paper guides
cleaning 190
locating 17
troubleshooting 199
paper input trays. See main input tray; priority input
tray
paper jams 83
copier/scanner 199
detection operations 96
printer input trays 198
paper lift plate
diagrams and part numbers 263, 269, 275
operations 94
paper-out sensor (PS201) 94, 96
paper output bin. See output bin
paper path
cleaning 59
testing 206
troubleshooting 209
paper pickup assembly
diagrams and part numbers 253, 260
removing 155
paper pickup roller. See pickup roller
paper top sensor (PS402) 94, 96
paper tray
diagrams and part numbers 253
Parallel
port, locating 17
parallel cable, ordering 243
parallel port
locating 17
parallel ports, troubleshooting 177
parameters 230
part numbers
alphabetical list 266
numerical list 271
partial characters, troubleshooting 189, 192
parts
ordering 242
removing and replacing 109
parts that wear 56
path
feeding operations 94, 95
print, cleaning 59
testing 206
paths
paper 209
PCL (Printer Command Language) 79
periods. See stages
phase sequence, fax 223
Phillips screwdrivers 109
phone numbers, ordering supplies 242
EN
phonebook report 210
photosensitive drum
inspecting 187
operations 91, 92, 93
rotation functional checks 202
troubleshooting 189
photosensors
locating 97
paper feed system 94
physical specifications 19
pickup assembly
diagrams and part numbers 253, 260
removing 155
pickup delay jams 96
pickup roller
cleaning 61
life expectancy 56
observing 206
operations 94
replacing 63
shaft, removing 157
pickup solenoid (SL001)
locating 97
observing 206
operations 94, 96
removing 151
pickup stationary jam 96
ADF 83
pins
heating element 203
high-voltage power supply 205
pixels per inch, maximum 18
PJL (Printer Job Language) 233
features 79
plate assemblies, removing 162
pliers, required 109
ports
ECP (Extended Capabilities) 76
locating 17
ports, troubleshooting
LPT 177
parallel 177
PostScript fonts, included 19
power
specifications 20
power cable, ordering 243
power receptacle, locating 17
power supplies
disconnecting 109
ECU 88
testing high-voltage 204
power switch 17
power switch, locating 17
PoziDriv screwdrivers 109
ppm (pages per minute) 19
preprinted paper, loading 50
Index 283
preservice checklist 110
pressure roller, operations 93
primary charging roller
operations 92
power supply 89
print cartridge door
locating 17
removing 133
print cartridges
high-capacity 18
life expectancies 56
operations 91
recycling 25
refilled 25
print density
troubleshooting 189
voltage operations 89
print path
cleaning 59
feeding operations 94, 95
testing 206
PRINT period 98
print quality, troubleshooting 188
print servers, ordering 243
Printer Command Language (PCL) 79
printer covers
diagrams and part numbers 252
printer drivers, ordering 242
Printer Job Language (PJL) 233
features 79
printer pickup roller
cleaning 61
life expectancy 56
observing 206
operations 94
replacing 63
shaft, removing 157
printer separation pad
cleaning 62
life expectancy 56
operations 94
replacing 65
printer top cover, removing 132
printer/scanner separation 113
printing
feed problems 197
loading media 49
troubleshooting 177, 194
priority input tray
feeding operations 94
feeding problems, troubleshooting 198
loading 49
locating 17
processor, formatter 76
production code 22
protocol trace report, printing 210
284
Index
PSTN 100
Q
quality, troubleshooting
copies and scans 194
printed pages 188
repetitive image defect ruler 236
R
RAM
base 18
formatter 76
reams, breaking 198
receiving faxes
fax tones 32
receptacle, power 17
recovering firmware 207
recycling print cartridges 25
redistributing toner 187
reduction settings 188, 196
refilled print cartridges 25
removing parts 109, 111
repetitive defects, troubleshooting 191, 236
replacement intervals
consumables 56
print cartridges 18
recycling used print cartridges 25
replacement parts. See parts
replacing parts 109, 111
reports
continuous self-test 229
fax trace 210
menu 36
printing 209
secondary service 229
T.30 protocol trace 210
reset 233
residual paper jams 96
resistance, heating element 203
resizing scanned images 196
resolution
faxing 21
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) 19
resolution, maximum 18
resolution, scanning 20
revision level 22
right plate assembly, removing 160
RING 100
rollers
life expectancies 56
observing 206
ROM 77, 207
base 18
rotation
drum 202
motor 206
EN
ruler, repetitive defect 236
S
scanline data 229
scanner
diagrams and part numbers 246
document path 82
image quality, troubleshooting 194
operations 80
removing 113
specifications 20
scanner assemblies 119
Scanner calibration 56
scanner formatter 76
scanning
loading originals 51
troubleshooting 177
scanning exposure stage, image formation process
92
scatter, toner 193
schedules, HP Technical Training 242
screwdrivers, required 109
screws
self-tapping 109
types of 244
secondary service menu 229
self test
continuous 229
self-tapping screws, installing 109
sending faxes
one recipient 31
sensor flag, paper-feed assembly 169, 171
sensors
locating 97
paper feed system 94
separation of scanner and printer 113
separation pads
cleaning 62
diagrams and part numbers 263, 270, 274
life expectancies 56
operations 94
replacing 65
separation stage, image formation process 93
sequence
operations 98
printed pages 54
removing parts 111
troubleshooting steps 174
serial number 22
service menu 37
service mode 233
settings
NVRAM variables 233
print job 79
shaft, pickup roller 157
shields, pickup assembly 156
EN
side media guides, locating 17
See also guides
signals, VIDEO 98
69T gear, removing 144
size
margins, minimum 188, 194
printer 19, 30
scanned images 196
skew
copies or scans, troubleshooting 199
printed pages, troubleshooting 192, 197
specifications 21
slots, DIMM 18
smears, toner 190
software
installation, troubleshooting 177
ordering 242
solenoid (SL001)
locating 97
observing 206
operations 94, 96
removing 151
space requirements 30
spare parts. See parts
special media
common problems 46
specifications 47– 49
specifications
fax 21
media 45
specks, toner 189, 193
speed
data transfer 79
printing and copying 19
processor 76
speed dial report 210
speed, copying 20
spots
printed pages 189, 193
scanned images 195
stages
image formation 92, 201
operation sequence 98
star screws 244
startup messages 77
statements
FCC Part 68 requirements 26
IC CS-03 requirements 27
telephone consumer protection act 27
static eliminator, operations 93
static, precautions for 109
stationary jams 96
ADF 83
status control 34
status information, relaying 76, 79
STBY (Standby) period 98
Index 285
storage environment, specifications 19
stored fax pages 105
advantages of flash memory storage 106
storing paper 197
straight-through output door
locating 17
streaks, vertical black 195
stripes, vertical white 193, 194
subpads
operations 94
supplies, ordering 242
support, technical 242
SupportPack, HP 24
SW301, overriding 206
switches
engine test 200
paper path test 206
power 17
system reset 233
T
T.30 protocol trace report, printing 210
technical support 242
Technical Training 242
telephone numbers, ordering supplies 242
temperature
fuser settings 190, 191
specifications 19
storing paper 197
troubleshooting 192
tests
drum rotation 202
engine 200
half-self functional check 201
heating element 203
high-voltage power supply 204
paper path 206
text, troubleshooting
misprinted 189, 192
scanned 196
thermistor connector 203
time/date, header menu 36
timing diagram, general 99
TIP 100
toner
cloth, ordering 244
image formation operations 92
loose, troubleshooting 191
redistributing 187
scattered, troubleshooting 193
smears, troubleshooting 190
specks, troubleshooting 189, 193
waste cleaning operations 93
toner cartridge area, cleaning 60
286
Index
toner cartridges
checking 187, 204
drum rotation check 202
extending life of 78
operations 92
part numbers 243
removing 110
toner cartridges. See print cartridges
tools, required 109
top-of-page sensor, ADF 83
trace report, printing 210
trailing edge, detection 96
ADF 83
Training, HP Technical 242
transfer roller
cleaning around 57
life expectancy 56
observing 206
operations 92
power supply 89
removing 140
transfer stage, image formation process 92
transparencies
cleaning print path with 59
loading 50
specifications for 46
trays. See main input tray; priority input tray
troubleshooting
control panel 175
copying 176
ECU (Engine Control Unit) 175
LPT ports 177
printing 177
scanning 177
software installation 177
troubleshooting steps 174
TrueType fonts, included 19
truss head screws 244
two-way communications 76, 79
U
Universal Serial Bus. See USB
unplugging printer 109
updating firmware code 207
upper metal shield, pickup assembly 156
USB
cable, ordering 243
interface 76
USB interface 78
V
vacuums, cautions against 60
variables, NVRAM 233
ventilation requirements 30
vertical black streaks, troubleshooting 195
vertical defects, troubleshooting 191
EN
vertical lines, troubleshooting 189
vertical white stripes, troubleshooting 193, 194
VIDEO signals 98
voltage
DC power supply 88
high-voltage power supply 89
overvoltage protection 89
W
WAIT period 98
warranty
extended 24
refilled cartridges, impact on 25
statement 23
waste toner receptacle 93
wave, troubleshooting 192, 197
websites 242
weight
printer 19
toner cartridge 187
white stripes, troubleshooting 193, 194
width, product 19, 30
wiring diagrams 237
wrapping jams 96
wrinkled pages, troubleshooting 197
writing stage, image formation process 92
Z
zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors 143
EN
287
288
Index
EN
copyright © 2002
Hewlett-Packard Company
www.hp.com/support/lj3300
*C9124-90948*
*C9124-90948*
C9124-90948